mm ,o cecal. .researches

IS SEE NORTH ATLANTIC

NORRIS WOLFER0EN

22102386878

Med

K4439

SCIENTIFIC AND BIOLOGICAL RESEARCHES
IN THE NORTH ATLANTIC

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in 2016

https://archive.org/details/b28083337

30 25 20

15 io 5 0 5 10

S

SKE

MOWING RC

“5 1 L\

1903

TCH CHA

5UTES OP

/ E R BE

1 903-1 907

...I904_. ._I9 0 5-6t ,,tl9

RT

THE 'i

LLE”

07

fACH

Chnslinnsi^^o^^i^'

KAKOK I*

&&&/ - ' y '\

9’ yltf' ■'s&Qx o Ifjiv A Y r

f§-' ' y\?- — % 0*j. /x y /> ,< ■

r5. FS' *\e ShethuxA l8J?uc> / Bergen - S~^\ *

T \ _ .9/ / . Mmnhyyi/ v_ l yw/y / y \

id:*.-?-'" ii/ 6 a lLn-~u- < */v-j/ ^ ' chrt§tiaj ia..

— ri- fx- r ■■ %<P j .. ~y„k

H 'is "•-... ?'t \

\ : ' Is .1 ■ >

FS\ K'!

Hork.IL — ^ .

f ,io3 ■’ _ nor t a (MW%

* /f

••

\

.£' ,* 7^^** f ^ FrAnkfuT- '-!

Lanliy r.iulO^^II'^idL , ^ JJ JT E L y^AbbcfJU / /{, S. .VV jCilr*\o. ^ fv

y

,

y

;•'•• ** /n «£ii - *7*^

y / s- i- 1 s \ v >

/■ 7? r A?if%a

j * 9 3 or ! 1 J

AZORES

OmnfotJc

OR WESTERN

k u‘

J.9-' \

>y''

y

A?

;/-;. ' ' • e :_F-f . ' \ s,,,,,/ o^jj^rUt

Flores®

FajalQ-^S: 'An&ra,

22iE}CO n^j-

’ Michael

f '. A lO^ r^'-^T-^1 C'nafrl/At, ill- /A rhinn't ,, N-O -tA ,\

/ ■■ V ^ pp.

5^/'. '$ §

l h-.4S 1 ^ '' llV< ''"''''

tir-fyi/ujy/iajtkYsbs-e*^’ ~ ’•-■►.47J'* j/ ""'^ v^sfttrT iilrifi- 'ifr-J ,TJ ]P) - ^^,-,1^., /" j-o^Ti iu# 1

'* Strait o/\oi7j^7f/r^^^p **(.i j)[[ . ■!& . , _ /Yrr^r‘,r/'Y'' '"' ,V «j

2&

\

' ' • . M A D

Miitlcii

1

.El R A

'mjE-z

s

\ ' -7 "‘f3/

.-"" ,S05S ^.oo,y\^yYy'b^^"

y^ r • - v 1 “ - - o ; ', !

c'fNS^ ~ ; i i

C.Ohit- ^\W-V. . ■"’ -' *• /

tO 5 Mi: n ill an ol 0 Greenwich.

MEMOIRS OF THE CHALLENGER SOCIETY. No. i.

SCIENTIFIC AND BIOLOGICAL
RESEARCHES IN THE NORTH

ATLANTIC

CONDUCTED BY THE AUTHOR ON HIS YACHTS
‘THE WALWIN ’ AND ‘THE SILVER BELLE’

BY R. NORRIS WOLFENDEN

B.A. ; M.D. Cantab Fellow of the Linmean Society ;

Fellow of the Zoological Society ; Fellow of the Challenger
Society ; Late Member of Council of the British Marine
Biological Association , &c.; and Member of the Royal
Temple Yacht Club

LONDON : REBMAN LIMITED

129 SHAFTESBURY AVENUE. MCMIX

[all rights reserved]

9-3 1€? 3

'llOYb ^

WELLCOME INSTITUTE
LIBRARY

Coll.

welMOmec

Call

No.

CM

FOREWORD

In the work which is recorded in the following pages, I owe a deep
debt of gratitude to several scientific friends, notably Dr. H. N.
Dickson, of Oxford and Reading, and to Mr. E. W. L. Holt (and
Mr. Byrne) and his associates of the Irish Fishery Board, and to
Professor Pettersson, of Stockholm, for their assistance in working
up some of the results of the observations made over a number
of years on my yachts. I fully recognize the fact that, there is
much material brought home from these cruises, which it has been
impossible yet to overlook, in the midst of many occupations. I
am painfully aware of the fact, that if I wait any longer for the
completion of the study of these biological collections, I may have
to defer the publication of such results as have been arrived at
until a time too remote to contemplate. This would be unjust to
my friends who have assisted me, and I must therefore give these
observations to the world in a less complete form than I had originally
contemplated, and hope for the opportunity to extend them at a
future time. Many of them have been contributed to the meetings
of the Challenger Society, which, however, does not publish Trans-
actions. I can only trust that they may prove of interest to
others who, like myself, have been fascinated by the study of things
oceanographical. With all modesty I put this little volume out,
not without the hope that it may stimulate others to assist science,
as I have endeavoured to do, by observations at sea, seriously
undertaken, and accurately recorded.

CONTENTS

PAGE

Introductory --------- 1

Extracts from the Logs of the Cruises in the Faeroe Channel, 1899-1902 13

The Cruise of 1903 from Valentia to the Faeroe Banks and Orkney - 18

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise- - - - - 25

The Log of the Cruise of 1905-1906 - - - - 42

Note of the 1907 Cruise ------- 54

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships - - - - - 58

Hydrographical Observations :

I. THE FAEROE-SHETLAND CHANNEL - - - - - 75

II. FROM IRELAND TO THE AZORES, MADEIRA, AND GIBRALTAR - - 97

III. FROM USHANT TO GIBRALTAR - - - - - - 107

IV. THE NORTH OF SHETLAND TO NORWAY - - - - - 130

Sections of Temperature and Salinity - - - - - 137

Biological Observations :

i. fishes 195

it. amphipoda and isopoda ...... 210

III. PYROSOMA -------- 220

Cruise of the ‘Silver Belle’ in July and August, 1907 - - - 225

vii

INTRODUCTORY.

In June, 1899, I made a cruise round the Shetland Islands, starting
from Stromness, in Orkney, and returning to the same place, and at
four stations, north, south, east, and west, I took careful temperature
observations, and made collections of plankton with silk nets. This
region and that of the Faeroe-Shetland Channel promising to yield
results of great scientific interest, both from a hydrographical and
faunistic point of view, and, moreover, having been hitherto hut im-
perfectly examined, I determined to institute periodic cruises. At that
time this area had not been taken over by the International Committee,
the first cruise of the North Sea Fisheries Investigation Committee,
indeed, not being undertaken until 1902 (August 25 to September 1,
which was followed by a second cruise in December of that year),
since which period this area has been under systematic investigation
by the Scotch Fishery Board. The work which I had done in this
region was preliminary to the more extended observations of this
official body, and directly antecedent to it, and is therefore of interest
as giving a picture of the hydrographical conditions of the Faeroe
Shetland Channel for two years and a half previously to the observa-
tions of the Scotch Fishery Board.1 As the plan of operations of the
latter body did not extend beyond the Faeroe Channel in a westward
direction, I made observations in 1903 from Yalentia to the Faeroe
Banks, along the deep-water trough of the Atlantic, not only for the
purpose of making certain observations upon the plankton fauna, but
also with the object, by hydrographical observations, of adding to the
official work, by obtaining physical data of an area which did not come

1 ‘Report on Fishery and Hydrographical Investigations in the North Sea and
Adjacent Waters,’ Fishery Board for Scotland, 1902-1903.

I

2

Introductory

within their scope, though adjacent to the 4 official ’ area. During the
year 1904 my yacht Silver Belle made an extended cruise from
Valentia (Ireland) to the Azores, thence to Madeira and Gibraltar,
and back to England across the Bay of Biscay to Plymouth.

The cruise of 1905, which at the time of writing was being
undertaken, covered much of the same ground, certain stations of the
1904 cruise being revisited, to again examine the conditions of a large
amount of Mediterranean water in the Atlantic, which formed so
striking a feature of the hydrographical results of 1904. Professor
Pettersson having kindly forwarded me one of his current meters, an
attempt was made to use this on all occasions possible, and the
faunistic work was largely devoted to trawling observations.

A private worker cannot hope to be equipped with the same costly
appliances in the shape of steam vessels, etc., which a body expending
Government funds may employ. Possessed only of small sailing-
ships — first, in the Faeroe Channel, of a small cutter yacht of less than
40 tons, subsequently of a ketch yacht of 130 tons — all the work
accomplished has been with comparatively small means. But I have
taken care to have my ships equipped with apparatus of the most
perfect and modern description, and the rest depends only upon
accuracy of observation, and the power and patience to work under
conditions often difficult, and to a landsman even appalling, but
which to a seaman are but everyday incidents. I would with
becoming modesty like to instance the amount of work accomplished
by my yacht, as an example of what may be done by sailing-vessels of
small tonnage, and to suggest that a great deal of very valuable
scientific work might be accomplished by similar vessels, especially in
areas which the International Council does not include within its plan
of operations — work which would greatly contribute to that extended
knowledge of the hydrography and conditions of life in the sea which
it is now the endeavour of combined nations to acquire. I cannot but
think that there are many yachtsmen who would willingly give their
assistance if they were only initiated into the work, and only realized
of what great importance scientific observations of this kind may be

Introductory

3

in helping to solve many problems of oceanography. This, though
a comparatively new science, practically dating only from the
memorable voyage of the Challenger in 1876, has to-day assumed
immense importance.

The scheme of work of international investigations has been well
set ont by Mr. D’Arcy Thompson as of three parts — viz., hydro-
graphical researches, biological observations and experiments, and
statistical inquiries. The latter, of course, is not possible for the
independent worker, but the scope of the two former is well described
by Mr. Thompson in the following words : ‘ It is laid down as
necessary that we should extend our very scanty knowledge as to the
phenomena of the sea itself, the distribution of its currents, the com-
position of its waters, and the changes that these factors undergo from
season to season, and from one year to another. ... It is not merely
matter of surmise, but there is already evidence at hand to prove that
the normal distribution and regular movements of many fishes are
linked with these physical phenomena, and to indicate that hydrography
holds the clue to the wanderings of the shoals. Together with these
hydrographical problems goes the kindred study of the plankton — a
multitudinous floating life that is variously associated with particular
waters, and that serve as food for a variety of fish.’

The scientific yachtsman may contribute much valuable informa-
tion in this and many other directions which it is not necessary to
indicate here, and it is earnestly to be hoped that such may be induced
before long to enter practically into this great scheme of the study of
the sea.1

The great expeditions, such as those of the Challenger , National ,
Valdivia , and many others, which have resulted in immense additions to

1 Professor O. Pettersson, Vice-President of the International Council for the
Investigation of the Sea, has suggested to me that an association of yacht-owners,
willing to devote part of their time to assistance in making observations at sea,
might be formed. Such an association should not be impossible, and I should be
willing to give the benefit of my experience to any who should be moved by
scientific enthusiasm to join in the work.

1—2

4

Introductory

our knowledge of oceanography and zoology, have been conducted
over large areas of space. There yet remain problems of vast interest
which can best he solved by smaller expeditions working over smaller
areas and working continuously. Observations, for instance, which
can be taken month by month over a small selected area must yield
results of very great importance.

On these voyages the objects have been : (1) To take hydro-
graphical observations — i.e ., records of the temperature of the water
from the surface to 1,000 fathoms (sometimes to 1,500 and 1,800
fathoms), along with collection of samples of water in a suitable
‘ water-bottle’ from these depths. These are at once bottled (in glass
bottles) on board the ship, and at the termination of the cruise the
water is analyzed to determine the salinity. These analyses have
been carried out under the supervision of Dr. H. N. Dickson at
Oxford, and his reports are given below. During 1904, also, a great
many vacuum tubes were filled with water from various depths for
the subsequent analysis of the proportions of oxygen and carbonic
acid. These analyses, which have been made by Professor Pettersson
at Stockholm, have yielded results of great interest and importance.
(2) The collection of the plankton, or minute life of the sea, in fine
silk nets, which gives important results, besides assisting hydro-
graphy in determining the vertical and horizontal distribution of the
smaller animals and of plants, which, though in many cases actively
swimming, are in all cases more or less, and in some entirely, at the
mercy of oceanic currents, and which also results in the discovery of
many new species.

The circulation of the oceanic waters of the North Atlantic Ocean
and the causes of the same, which has been ascribed variously to
physical causes — viz., the heating of surface waters of the tropical
regions, and cooling of water in the Polar regions ; to the influence of
prevailing winds ; shortly and vigorously by Pettersson to the melting
of ice from the Polar regions — are matters for subsequent discussion.
It is thought better for the present merely to record in the pages
following the scientific observations which I have made from the

Introductory

Faeroe Islands to Madeira, tlie Azores, and the Straits of Gibraltar, the
bearing of which upon modern theories of the circulation of Atlantic
waters will be better dealt with later on.

For the purpose of scientific investigations of this kind, a brief
description of the appliances necessary may be given.

1. Water-bottles for the collection of samples of sea- water at
different depths. It matters little what form of bottle is used, pro-
vided only that the apparatus can be guaranteed to collect the sample
of water from a given area without admixture of water from any layer
above or below. On board the Challenger the apparatus in use was
the bottle devised by Buchanan, and which, notwithstanding ‘ improved ’
forms of apparatus, is still quite sufficiently accurate for the purpose.
This is the form of ‘ bottle ’ which has been constantly used on board
the Silver Belle. When the work was first undertaken in the Faeroe
Channel, Mills’ water-bottle was used, and this is sufficiently useful
for moderate depths. Buchanan’s bottle, which is a larger apparatus,
carries a reversing thermometer on a frame attached to the cylinder.
It is lowered and raised on a wire reeled off a drum which carries
2,000 fathoms, and the hauling on board the drum, which is fixed on
a specially-made winch, is actuated by steam, as hand-hauling at such
depths would not be practicable. The water-bottles of Pettersson-
Nansen are much more elaborate, consisting of concentric tubes, with
the thermometer inside the tubes. In a new pattern, the outside
frame carries a reversing thermometer, ‘ which may be used instead
of the deep-sea thermometer, or as a check on the results obtained
thereby.1 That the use of thermometers inside the lid of the water-
bottle is not considered absolutely essential by the International
Council is indicated by the remarks of Helland Hansen in the same
report:2 4 On account of faults in the manufacture three of them’ —
i.e., Nansen-Itichter thermometers — ‘ were broken during the August
cruise, so that at some stations we were obliged to use good ordinary
thermometers (with milk-glass scale), which were put into the water-
bottle after it had come up on deck. As the temperature of the air

1 Robertson, ‘ North Sea Investigations,’ p. 54>. 2 Ibid., p. 3.

6

Introductory

did not differ very much from that of the water, we may neglect the
errors caused by this method.’

On hoard the Silver Belle we have always employed Miller-Casella
thermometers or Knudsen’s bulbs, and we have been very fortunate in
escaping accidents by breakages. The reversing thermometer is one
supplied by Negretti and Zambra, and this and the Miller-Casella
were found to vary only two or three tenths of a degree. The air
and surface-water temperatures were taken by a thermometer supplied
from the Plymouth Laboratory, made by Muller, Orme and Co., rising
from 9° C. to 36° C., and divided in tenths (compared with thermo-
meter 303 Richter, and verified at Charlottenburg). All our instruments
have been similarly verified. The deptli is recorded by a wheelmeter
reading fathoms.

2. For the collection of plankton silk nets (of bolting silk 100 to
170 mesh) were employed, and as the desire was to collect the plankton
at definite depths, closing-nets have been always employed when
working below 100 fathoms. Closing-nets may he made to work
vertically, as in Fowler’s net,1 or horizontally, as in Garstang’s and
the author’s nets. Opinions may he divided as to the relative
advantages of these two methods of fishing for plankton, but the
objection that a horizontally-towing net, which has to be towed at a
very gentle pace (with just sufficient way on the ship to keep her
barely moving), is never at the depth imagined loses force when it is
realized that a vertically -hauled net is so raised through a hundred or
more fathoms at each haul between the opening and closing. Besides
which it is probably of little importance in working in deep water
whether the net is, say, at 1,000 or 900 fathoms, and, moreover, the
accuracy of the observations is checked by appending to the net-frame
one or more thermometers. A reversing Negretti thermometer is
invariably attached to our nets when plankton -fishing, and as the
temperatures in the Atlantic at known depths are fairly constant, the

1 Dr. Fowler’s net is described in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society. He
was kind enough to superintend the making of one for me, which we used very much
in the Faeroe Channel in 1909.

Introductory

7

reading of the thermometer gives a pretty accurate indication of the
precise depth at which the net has been. The net remains down
usually for fifteen minutes after the opening messenger has been sent
down, and is then closed and hauled up.

There are advantages about the use of a horizontally-towing net as
compared with one vertically actuated, in that the supposed depth is
more accurately located to within a few fathoms ; and again, that as
marine organisms usually move in shoals, a horizontal net is more
likely to capture them than a vertical net, which may pass by a
moving shoal, although it may capture a large amount of material by
passing through a large vertical excursus.

The chief object of these researches is to determine generally
what species are mesoplanktonic and epiplanktonic throughout a
portion or the whole of their existence, and to determine as far as
is possible the horizontal and vertical distribution of various species,
as far as regards their relation to bathymetrical and climatic con-
ditions.

The desideratum of a good and effectively opening and closing net
for deep-water work being great, the author and his skipper, Buchan
Henry, set to work to devise an apparatus of the kind which should
be effective in deep water ; and the instrument which is described
briefly has been found to meet all requirements.

The inability to determine with absolute accuracy the depth at
which any net, either of vertical or horizontal pattern is working, of
course renders all real experimental work only approximate in its
results ; but I think it must be conceded that all open nets — ?'.e., nets
which are not designed to open and close by messengers or other
effective device at the supposed depth — can only be regarded as
inefficient in any problems of vertical distribution.1

1 Professor (). Pettersson attaches a small net to his current meter, so that water
samples, temperature, the velocity of the current, and a sample of the plankton of
the area can be taken at one and the same time. Though very useful, Professor
Pettersson’s statement that this is the only accurate test yet devised for taking
reliable samples of plankton cannot be supported, the net being an open one with
no mechanism for closing.

8

Introductory

The worst of all nets of this kind is that the amount of plankton
captured is often very small, and it is only the smaller animals
which cannot escape, while larger beasts, endowed with great activity,
can avoid the snare ; hut as Copepoda form the great hulk of the
plankton in deep water, and their distribution in relation to ocean
currents is perhaps the most important, these little Crustacea are
captured in sufficient quantity by the horizontally-towed net.

As it may be of interest to some to describe how these operations
are conducted on a small sailing-vessel, I give a short description of
the disposal of apparatus and method of working on hoard ship.

A steam boiler is fixed under deck, and supplies motive power to
a capstan amidships, of the type generally employed on the larger
fishing vessels.

In series with this is a strongly-made winch, specially designed for
the purpose by Messrs. Bullivant and Co., which carries two drums,
one for 2,000 fathoms of wire for the closing-net and water-bottle,
etc., the other a smaller reel containing fine sounding-wire. The winch
is fitted with clutch and brake.

The wire used is of seven strands, galvanized, 17 gauge, •056" diameter,
each taking 520 pounds of strain, so that the total breaking strain is
about 2,800 pounds. There is a good deal of difference in wire, which
requires to he of the very best manufacture. In a wire of less perfect
make, which we once had from Birmingham, the strands overrode
the central core, so that the wire was from the first useless, the
messenger refusing to descend beyond the obstruction caused by the
overriding; of the wire.

In 1904 we used a wire of 16 gauge, also of seven strands, 2,000
fathoms, weighing 7 cwt., and with a diameter of *064", and breaking
strain of nearly 4,000 pounds ; hut although on one occasion in very
deep water we nearly lost the heavy closing-net through the breaking
of all the strands except one, caused by the riding up and down in an
exceptionally heavy sea, the lighter wire is sufficiently strong for
ordinary purposes. The fact is that heavy closing-nets should not he
used in a heavy sea-way. The risk is great, and the results obtained

Introductory

9

are usually very small ; the violent jerking of the wire and net pre-
vents it turning and fishing properly, and throws a terrific strain upon
the whole, which is likely to lead to breaking away. On one occasion
in the Faeroe Channel we thus lost 120 fathoms of fine piano wire,
Garstang’s net, and two thermometers, a sudden strain causing the
wire to snap close to the surface.

All wire made by Messrs. Bullivant and Co. can be guaranteed to
be as near perfection as possible, and to stand any strain to which
such wire ought reasonably to be submitted.

From the winch the wire is led over a gun-metal wheel, to which
is attached an indicator which marks in fathoms the amount of wire
let out. From this wheel the wire is led over a running wheel at the
upper end of a stout spar, which is fixed at the bottom by a hook on
to the mainmast, and by a length of good manilla rope at the upper
end over a pulley again attached to the mast, and so arranged that the
spar can be readily swung out at the desired angle over the bulwarks
of the port or starboard side.

In comparatively shallow water — /.e., down to 500 fathoms — a
sounding is made with ordinary hand-line and sounding-lead, and a
sample of the bottom brought up and preserved ; in deep water the
hand-line is never used, the depth to which the water-bottle or heavy
closing-net is lowered being read off on the fathom -indicating wheel, a
preliminary sounding being generally made with the fine sounding-wire.

While it is impossible to work closing-nets with satisfaction in
rough sea-way, we have never found this an obstacle to the use of the
water-bottle, or temperature observations, and these observations were
therefore made when at sea with regularity daily, and throughout the
cruise from Valentia to the Azores, at distances of about fifty miles
apart.

Description of New Tow-Net for Deep Water.

During the 1903 and 1904 cruises we have used almost exclusively
the net figured below. With it considerably over 400 hauls were then
made from 50 to 2,000 fathoms, and it only failed to open or shut
at the right time on very few occasions, and then only when used in

2

10

Description of a New Tow-Net

conditions of sea and weather when no tow-net could be guaranteed
to act with satisfaction. On one occasion, at the end of a long cruise
(in 1903), one of the side-springs broke, hut this was easily replaced
on hoard, and once, in 1904, when the net unfortunately had been
bumping against the Hoor of the sea, the central piston became bent,
and the weakening thus caused led to its breakage shortly afterwards.
This, however, was quickly repaired on board. The net is designed
to tow horizontally. As will be seen from the figure, it consists of
four detachable pieces: (1) The main cylinder, with arrangement at
the bottom for attaching weight, if necessary, and thermometers-
(2) Sliding down it a central piston which runs freely through the top
piece, enlarged at the bottom end that it may, when fully withdrawn,
catch upon the side-springs inserted inside the upper portion of the
main cylinder ; these springs are then pushed through the lateral slots,
and are designed to catch the arms of the net-frame and hold the
lower pair in position when the net is closed ready for lowering. The
upper portion of the central cylinder (detachable with the piston) has
strong lateral steel springs (we have found steel preferable to any
other metal for this purpose, and with proper attention it does not
rust), four in number. (3) A funnel-shaped top piece put on over the
top springs, and which receives the impact of the large closing-
messenger. (4) The four arms of the net-frame, attached to short
metal tubes which slide freely over the main cylinder.

A hen the net is about to he used, the wire is run through the
piston and main cylinder and bent on to the device at the bottom (this
is cast in one piece with the main cylinder) ; the top piece is screwed
home on the main cylinder, the funnel pushed slightly down, the arms
raised, and the piston drawn up, so that the lower pair of arms catch
on the smaller pair of side-springs in the main cylinder, which is
insured by raising the piston. By pushing down the funnel the upper
arms are caught on the four strong springs of the top piece, and they
are made secure by withdrawing the funnel a little. The net is then
ready, securely closed, for lowering. To open it under water, a small
messenger is sent down which strikes the top of the piston, drives it
down the cylinder, the lateral springs of which recede inside, and the

CO

Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig.

12

Description of a New Tow-Net

lower arms are released, falling to the bottom of the cylinder. To
close it, a large messenger, the diameter of the funnel, strikes the
latter, drives it down, and, compressing the upper springs, the upper
arms are also released and fall to the bottom, and the net is securely
closed.

The three positions of the net — (1) ready closed for lowering,
(2) open as in towing, (3) closed ready for raising — are shown in the
figures on p. 11.

The whole net-frame, from the top of the funnel to the bottom of
the cylinder, is 3 feet 4 inches long when the net is opened, and 3 feet
2 inches when the net has been shut. The outside diameter of the
main cylinder is 2 inches, and its length 2 feet 9-g- inches ; the length
of the piston 20 inches ; the top of the funnel 4^ inches diameter, and
the lower end, which fits over the main cylinder, 2|- inches.

The fine silk (bolting silk) net is 3 feet fi inches long, stitched on
to a leather border of inches length, which is attached to the frame.
Conical in shape, at the end it is only 6 inches diameter, and in order
to prevent maceration of the captured specimens, which occurs in the
ascent of the net by the friction of the sides falling together, I have
for long used a cane hoop sewn into the net a little way before the
end, which serves to keep the end of the net open, and has proved to
be markedly advantageous to the preservation of the specimens. As
silk nets are apt to get torn, and not unfrequently have burst under
the pressure, we have also for long now used the protective covering
of a duck-bag, inside which the silk net is freely suspended. This has
effected a great saving in silk nets.

This net-frame was made for me by the eminent engineers
Messrs. Bullivant and Co., of London, who expended much time and
experiment in the construction of the models, and produced a net-
frame of perfect workmanship. The simplicity of the apparatus, and
its accuracy in opening and shutting under water, leave nothing to be
desired. I have endeavoured to give a description of the net without
overloading it with technical details, but a more accurate (from an
engineer’s point of view) description can be readily obtained from the
specification drawn up by Messrs. Bullivant and Co.

EXTRACTS FROM THE LOGS OF THE CRUISES IN THE
FAEROE CHANNEL, 1899—1902.

The Walwin is a little cutter of thirty-six tons, originally built at
Salcombe, and was first devoted by me to scientific work in 1899.
Manned by a crew of Shetlanders, than whom there are no finer
seamen in the world, she cruised round Shetland from October, 1899,
to June, 1900, visiting four stations, referred to afterwards as 1., II.,
III., IV., once a month, taking temperatures, collecting water samples
(part of the time), and dredging and collecting plankton. From the
first Buchan Henry has been in charge of the apparatus used on
board the Walwin and on the Silver Belle , in the later more extended
cruises ; and probably there are few who have acquired a more
intimate knowledge of the conduct of such observations on board a
sailing-ship than he. In -Inly, 1900, the little Walwin made her first
trip to Faeroe, revisiting some of the stations in August of that year.
In 1901 she made other cruises to Faeroe, in May and June, and revisited
some stations in the Faeroe Channel in July. In 1902 she crossed the
Faeroe Channel in May, June, and July, and revisited some stations in
August. It would be tedious to reproduce the ship’s log of these
passages ; but all who know this region will admit that pitching about
the Faeroe Channel in a little 36-ton boat is not the pleasantest of
experiences, and it needs determination as well as scientific enthusiasm
to conduct observations under these conditions. The work was
especially arduous, because there was no room for steam to assist
haulage in such a small vessel ; consequently everything had to be
done by willing hands. As an example of the kind of weather some-
times met with round Shetland in the winter-time, the following brief
extract from the log may be taken :

13

2 2

14

The Cruises in the Faeroe Channel, 1899 — 1902

January G, 1900. — Strong gale.

January 9. — A storm from the north-west, and very heavy sea, the
steamer from Aberdeen to Scalloway being twenty-four hours overdue.

January 27. — Squalls, with rain and snow.

February 3. — The ship kept several hours in Blue Mull Sound by
snowstorm.

February 5. — Strong gale; both anchors down all night in Culi Yoe.
Thermometer 26° F.

February 8. — Snowstorm with frost.

February 11. — Strong breeze and snowstorm ; two anchors down.

February 16. — A storm, with snow, began at 12 last night (the
ship at anchor in Scalloway Bay) ; at 2 a.m. a hurricane, the ship
dragging both anchors ; at G a.m. she ceased to drag any farther, but
at 8 a.m. there was a full hurricane, nearly every ship in the harbour
dragging anchors, and three ships ashore ; impossible to see twenty
yards for blinding snow ; force of hurricane increased till 10 a.m., the
small boat towing astern having her bows completely smashed in.

February 17. — 6 a.m. some improvement, but still a whole gale
with snow. The steamer St. Giles , from Aberdeen, came into Scallo-
way with her deck badly smashed, the bridge and all boats gone.

February 18. — A strong gale.

February 21. — Strong gale from north-east, with snow showers.

March 1. — Snow.

March 2. — A gale from north-north-east.

March 9. — A gale from north-west.

March 19. — A gale from north.

March 25. — Whole gale north-east to north, with snow.

April G. — Strong gale from south-east.

April 30. — Whole gale from south-west, with sleet.

July 5. — Left for Faeroe, but had to put back again.

July 10. — Double-reefed mainsail and storm-jib.

July 12. — Split mainsail in two places.

July 14. — Thick mist and almost calm ; had to tow the ship to
within one mile of Thorshaven. From 15th to 18th lying at Thorshaven
with thick mist all the time.

The Cruises in the Faeroe Channel, 1899 — 1902

15

July 20. — Left Thorshaven with light wind and calm sea.

July 21. — Fresh breeze which increased, at night necessitating
double reef in mainsail, and small jib.

July 22. — Wind less and reefs shaken out ; heavy rain.

July 23. — Early on fresh breeze, increasing, so that at 8 p.m. it
was necessary to reef the mainsail.

July 24. — Double reefs.

On August 16 Mr. Hodgson, who had been appointed biologist to
the Antarctic ship Discovery , left Orkney on board the Walwin to
visit some stations in the Faeroe Channel and gain some experience
before leaving for his long Antarctic cruise. After leaving Scalloway
on August 21, the ship was twice put back to Hillswick, but August 24
opened absolutely calm. However, by 2 p.m. the wind was rising, and
at 10 p.m. the mainsail was double-reefed and storm-jib set. For
twenty-four hours the bad weather continued, and the ship was put
back to Hillswick for the third time. The 27th and 28th August
were tine, and station A2 was reached, after which the ship returned
to Scalloway.

During the cruises of 1901, the month of June was marked by
several strong gales, so that from the 18th to the 21st the mainsail
was continuously double-reefed.

In 1901, the Walwin left Scalloway on May 13 for Faeroe; on
May 14 was compelled to return to Snaraness by stress of weather.
Leaving on the 20th, and for two days under double-reefed mainsail, she
arrived at Thorshaven on May 22. Then from May 23 to 27 was calm
weather, with fog of varying thickness, bright sunshine, and calm
on the 28th. Having left Thorshaven on the 29th, on the 30th double
reefs were required again, and it was necessary to run back for shelter
to Trangasvaag. May 31, strong gales; June 1, terrific squalls, riding
with both anchors out ; June 2, strong gales, at noon the wind dving
away, to a light breeze at 6.30 p.m. ; on the 4th and 5th reefed sails
and strong gales, anchoring the same day in Scalloway.

On June 18, again leaving Scalloway, for two days with haze and
strong breeze ; on the 21st, was the first day of anything like summer

16

The Cruises in the Faeroe Channel, 1899- 1902

weather, and the first time for three days the reefs could he shaken
out of the sails. By evening double reefs were required again ! On
the 22nd, while working in a heavy swell, the wire snapped, and the
Garstang closing- net, 2 thermometers and 120 fathoms of wire, went
to the bottom of the Faeroe Channel. There was nothing to do,
therefore, but to return to Scalloway.

Leaving Scalloway on July 3 with a new net, the 4th and 5th were
calm ; the 7th, under reefed sails, Thorshaven was reached in a whole
gale. From the 8th to the lltli with rain, fog and gales, anchored in
Thorshaven. Leaving on the loth in a light breeze, double reefs were
not shaken out again until entering Scalloway on the 18tb.

These brief extracts from the log of the Walwin for 1900 and 1901
show what sort of weather is to be expected in this region even in
summer, and the painfully difficult conditions under which work has
to he conducted. 1 therefore replaced the little Walwin by a larger
ship, the Sillier Belle (130 tons), which, having been built on North
Sea fishing-ketch lines, I refitted as a yacht, putting on board a steam
capstan to perform the haulage.

The Silver Belle left Scalloway on May 15 for Thorshaven, the
weather being very much the same as the Walwin experienced the
previous years — viz., strong gales, requiring sails reefed Lying in
Thorshaven Harbour from the 24th, no communication was possible
with the shore for three whole days.

May 27, after leaving Thorshaven, sails had to be reefed again,
and the ship run back for Trangasvaag for shelter, and next day one
trawler, four smacks, and H.M.S. Bellona had sought the same refuge.
On the 29tli the whole land was covered with snow. Leaving this
anchorage on May 30, with course set for the Butt of Lewis, double
reefs were required next day. On June 1, sounding on 400 fathoms,
a sharp swell and the riding of the ship caused the line to break, and
400 fathoms and the 28-pound lead were lost. On June 3 the ship
was brought to anchor in Stornoway, for two days previously all sails
close-reefed.

17

The Crimes in the Faeroe Channel , 1899 — 1902

_ f

The second cruise from Scalloway to Faeroe was started on June 18
after a week of continuous gales. For three days after leaving sails
were double-reefed, and it required forty-eight hours of dodging round
Station A2 before it was safe to venture any apparatus out. Faeroe
was reached on June 22, and Scalloway amiin on the 30th, after three
days at Thorshaven. The third cruise was commenced on July 8,
double reefs again necessary, and on the 10th running back to
St. Magnus Bay for shelter. Thorshaven was reached on the 17th,
and Scalloway again on the 23rd.

The ‘ summer ’ weather of 1902 was but a repetition of that of
1901. The hydrographical observations made on these cruises are
dealt with later on by Dr. H. N. Dickson.

3

Station

El.

Station

E2.

Station

E3.

THE CRUISE OF 1903 FROM VALENTI A TO THE FAEROE

BANKS AND ORKNEY.

On June 10, 1903, the Silver Belle left Valentia with a light breeze
from north-east, overcast sky, and falling barometer, and a swell at
sea growing bigger, with increasing wind. On reaching the station
in Eat. 51° 56' N., Long. 11° 21' W., the weather was really too bad for
work. A sounding gave 120 fathoms, with a bottom temperature of
10’2° C. Bad weather continued through the night, but improved
at daylight next day, and settled down into a line, warm day, and,
sounding in 130 fathoms, the closing-net was put down to 125 and
then 60 fathoms, getting a lot of stuff at each haul. Water samples
were also taken.

Sailing and drifting about thirty-three miles west by north during
the night, as daylight came the wind and sea grew worse. At 4 a.m.,
sounding with wire and a 56-pound lead, bottom was struck at 560
fathoms, the line ‘plumb’ straight, the position being Lat. 51° 46',
Long. 12° 15'. The closing-net was put down, which, with wire
and 56-pound weight attached to the bottom of the frame, weighed
over 2 cwt. ; the line stood quite straight, and hauls were made
from 550, 400, 300, 200, and 100 fathoms, and water samples at
every 100 fathoms from 500. The weather completely breaking,
and sea and wind growing gradually worse, work in deep water was
almost out of the question. The ship was therefore put back to
Valentia to wait for an improvement. There she remained until
June 18, when a start was again made for dee}) water. Twenty
miles west of the Skelligs it came on to blow hard, with a falling
barometer, and this continued all the next day (Friday), but Saturday
fell quite calm, and the consequence of this was that the ship never

18

Cruise of 1903 from Valentin to the Faeroe Banks and Orkney 19

got beyond the 100-fathom line until Sunday, June 2 1, when the
position Lat. 51° 34' N., Long. 12° 30' W., was reached. All day the
wind blew hard from the south, and the yacht dodged all day and
night with sails reefed. At 4 a.m. on Monday, the weather having
considerably moderated, a sounding gave 725 fathoms. The closing-
net was used at 700 fathoms and each 100 fathoms above it. For
the next thirty-six hours the weather was very dirty, but on June 24
the ship was hove to, the wind having dropped, in Lat. 51° 00' 1ST.,
Long. 11° 3 2' W., and a sounding gave 375 fathoms. The closing-net
was used down to 300 fathoms.

After a course of 20 miles west-north- west, the ship was hove to all
night, and at 5 a.m. on June 24 a sounding was taken in Lat. 51° 00',
Long. 12° 00', giving 980 fathoms. With such a heavy sea the
closing-net, put down to 900 fathoms, though with a perfectly ‘ plumb ’
line, captured nothing, and only water samples were taken from
900 fathoms to the surface. Two of the thermometers to-day were
rendered useless, one having the end broken off and the other coming
up with the mercury above the index. The glass falling, and every-
thing looking as unpromising as possible for work, the ship was put
back to Valentia.

On July 5 another useless attempt was made to work a deep-water
station ; after dodging round for three days with strong gales and
heavy sea, a sounding gave 1,030 fathoms and a bottom temperature
of 4-4° the position, Lat. 50° 56' N., Long. 12° 6' W. With a donble-
reefed mainsail, storm-jib and reefed foresail and double-reefed mizzen,
the ship pitched about all night with a very heavy swell from the north.
Next morning, July 0, the wind dropped, and in the same position the
closing-net was put down to 1,000 fathoms, bringing up quite a decent
haul, then to 700, 500, 300, 200, and 100, all very successful. The
triangle net, put down with 120 fathoms of rope in front of the net, a
16-pound lead, and 1,000 fathoms of wire, brought up about 2 cwt.
of chalky ooze from the bottom, with nothing in it but a few shells.
The closing-net brought up in the 500-fathom haul a lovely specimen
of Acanthopyra sica (vel Agassizi).

Station

E4.

Station

E5.

Station

EG.

3 2

20 Crime of 1903 from Valenti a to the Faeroe Banks and Orkney

Station

E7.

Station

E8.

Station
E9, 10,
11.

Station

E12.

Station
El 3.

Running thirty-four miles during the night with a south-south-
west wind, at 4 a.m., July 7, the ship was hove-to in Lat. 51° 30' N.,
Long. 12° 00' AY. A sounding gave 616 fathoms, bottom stones and
sand; the closing-net was used at 600, 500, 300, 200, and 100 fathoms,
and water samples taken from 600, 300, etc., fathoms.

On July 8, the position being Lat. 52° 00' N., Long. 12° 00' AY.,
depth 255 fathoms, with a bottom of fine grey sand, the closing-net
and water-bottle were used.

On July 9, Lat. 53° 30' N., Long. 12° 00' AY., a sounding
gave 150 fathoms. Stations 10 and 11 were in shallow water
respecting Lat. 53° 00' N., Long. 11° 56' AY., depth 100 fathoms,
and Lat. 53° 30' N., Long. 12° 00' AY., depth 150 fathoms. Both
were worked with closing-net and water-bottle, and on the same
day in Lat. 54° 00' N., Long. 12° 00' AY., a depth of 205 fathoms.
At both stations the closing-net and water-bottle were used as
usual.

At midnight of July 9 the position Lat. 54° 30' N., Long. 12° 00'
AY., was reached, and, double reefing the sails, although the wind was
light, so as to make as little leeway as possible, a sounding gave 1,608
fathoms, with a bottom of grey ooze. A thick fog, with light breeze
from west-south-west, turned to heavy rain. The net was put down
to 1,600 fathoms, and brought some stuff in it, though not very much,
and also at 1,000 fathoms, and at 800 and 600 fathoms good hauls.
At 400 fathoms it contained a very fine specimen of Phronomopsis
sedentaria. The hauls at 300, 200, and 100 fathoms were good. In
all these hauls, the weather being favourable, the sounding- wire was
perfectly ‘plumb,’ and the heavy wire and closing-net almost entirely
so. Water samples were taken at 1,500 fathoms and upwards.
Having drifted somewhat eastwards, the water-bottle struck bottom
at 1,500 fathoms, and in the subsequent haul at 1,300 fathoms it again
struck bottom, bringing up mud and ooze along with the water.
Evident! v there was here a very steep bank. During this time the
ship was drifting a quarter of a mile per hour. At 1,100 fathoms
there was no bottom.

Cruise of 190.3 from Valentia to the Faeroe Banks and Orkney 21

A light north-west wind carried the ship to the next station Ela4|on
at 8 p.m. on July 11, and at daylight, July 12, the position was Lat.

54° 50' N., Long. 12° 00' W. On this and some subsequent occasions a
Massey’s sounding-machine was used, and compared with the fathom-
counter. The former struck bottom and registered 1,737 fathoms,
the latter only 1,577 fathoms. Massey’s machine was evidently not
reliable in deep water. The closing-net put down to 1,000 fathoms
brought up a small quantity of stuff, and at 700 and 500 fathoms
about the same. From 400 fathoms the net was used at each
100 fathoms to the surface. Towards evening the ship had drifted
about a dozen miles, consequently the night was spent in beating to
windward to get back to the position, and at 4.30 a.m. on July 13 the
ship was hove to, and water samples were taken from 1,500 fathoms
upwards. The work at this station occupied two full days.

Before the next station was reached, on July 16, four days had?,1?*1011
been spent with very dirty weather and very bad sea with a heavy
cross swell, impossible to work satisfactorily. The position was
Lat. 55° 17' N., Long. 12° 28' W., and bottom was struck at 1,561
fathoms. Massey’s machine gave 1,645 fathoms, and the probable
explanation of this discrepancy is that after Massey’s machine touches
the bottom, the ship rolling heavily, and the winch not being quick
enough to stop the lead from sinking a little with every roll, the
machine keeps registering, and the more the number of rolls and the
greater the length of time before the machine is hauled on board, the
greater the amount registered. A very simple device would cause the
machine to lock directly it struck bottom, and then it would be useful
and reliable. The water-bottle was put down to 1,500, 1,300, 1,100, and
every 100 fathoms to the surface. The work occupied fifteen hours.
During the night the ship had sailed about seven miles east-south-east
to make up for the driftage of the day and get back to the position
and at 6 a.m. on July 17 she was hove to, and with a very fine
morning, and very light breeze from north-east, and a lone1 o’entle
swell, the closing-net was put down to 1,000 fathoms and towed for
twenty minutes, and brought up a good haul, chiefly Copepoda. The

22 Cruise of 1903 from Valenti a to the Faeroe Fanis and Orkney

Station
El 6.

Station
El 7.

Station
El 8.

Station

FI.

Station

F2.

Station

F3.

Station

F4.

Station

F5.

hauls at 800, 600, 400, 300, 200, and 100 fathoms were all good. The
day was very favourable for tow-netting, the line standing almost
straight.

On July 19 the position was Lat. 55° 47' N., Long. 10° 12' W.,
and depth by sounding 1,325 fathoms. Heaving to, the closing-net
was sent down to 1,000, 700, 500, 400,300, and 100 fathoms, and water
samples were taken.

Sailing all night to north and east with light wind, the position on
July 20 was Lat. 56° 11' N., Long. 9° 50' W., and depth by sounding
875 fathoms. The closing-net was put down to 820, 700, and 600
fathoms. At the latter haul was obtained a tine specimen of Gnatho-
phausia zocea , who with his strong spines had torn the net into shreds
for about 6 inches in fighting to escape. Hauls were also taken at
500, 400, 300, 200, and 100 fathoms.

On July 21, at 6 a. m., after a dirty night of wind and rain
from the south, the ship was hove to in position Lat. 56° 37' N.,
Long. 9° 48' W., in 912 fathoms by sounding, but there was too
much sea for successful tow-netting though the attempt was made at
800, 600, 500, and 400 fathoms, so a course was set for Stornoway, in
the Hebrides.

On August 4, in Lat. 58° 24' N., Long. 8° 30' W., the depth was
110 fathoms, and after a vertical haul with the silk net, the vessel
proceeded to the next station, Lat. 58° 45' N., Long. 8° 35' W., depth
342 fathoms, and the closing-net and water-bottle were used at 300,
200, and 100 fathoms.

On August 6, in position Lat. 59° 18' N., Long. 8° 30' W., the
depth 841 fathoms, closing-net and water-bottle were used from
800 fathoms up, and with a fresh wind from north-west, way was made
for the next station, reached at 2 a.m. on August 7, Lat. 59° 54' N.,
Long. 8° 42' W., depth 720 fathoms, and closing-net and water-bottle
were used from 700 fathoms upwards.

On August 8, Lat. 60° 29' N., Long. 8° 30' W., and depth
194 fathoms, after using closing-net and water-bottle the wind began
to rise very fast, and a dirty sky and rapidly falling barometer

Cruise of 1903 from Valentia to the Faeroe Banks and Orkney 23

presaging a ‘ duster ’ from the east, way was made for the next station, |^tlon
which was reached at 4 a.m. on August 9. The situation was on the

o

Faeroe Bank, Lat. 60° 41' N., Long. 8° 50' W., depth 75 fathoms, and
while using the water-bottle one of the crew amused himself by
catching two very large cod with hand-line. The weather still
stormy and sea very bad, with low barometer, it was thought better to
run into Thorshaven, especially as a few ‘ odds and ends ’ were required.

This port was reached at 10 p.m. on August 10, leaving the Bank at
4 a.m. the same day.

Leaving Thorshaven on August 12 with a hue and calm day, F7.
which prevented rapid progress, on the 13th, at 8 a.m. the Munk Rocks
were passed, and at 4 p.m. the position Lat. 61° 1' N., Long. 7° 42' W.,
gave a depth by sounding of 475 fathoms, the depth being surprising,
as much shallower water was expected here. However, it proved not
to he a hole, but to continue for at least 6 miles in a northerly direc-
tion, and may have extended farther, hut was not explored. The
bottom temperatures showed it to be in the cold area ( — 0'5° at 460
fathoms, (H)° at 420, 2-4° at 300, 6-6° at 200, 8T° at 100, 10'7° at
surface ; air temperature 11 ’0°).

On August 14, in Lat. 60° 30' N., Long. 7° 47' W., the depth }gtion
547 fathoms, and still in the cold area (bottom temperature — 0*8 ; at
400 fathoms 1‘0° ; 300, 5-3° ; 200, 8T° ; 100, 8*6° ; surface 11'4°,
air 11°), the closing-net and water-bottle were used as usual. With a
falling barometer, reefed mainsail and mizzen at 10 p.m. it was
blowing a gale and raining in torrents, necessitating double reefs in
mainsail and mizzen and a reef in the foresail. Hove to, the ship
rode it out, lying to, as the skipper expressed it, 11 like a duck.’

Next day, August 17, was hue, though the sea was heavy, and in ^tl0U
Lat. 60° 1' N. and Long. 6° 4' W., depth 580 fathoms, the temperature
of the bottom was only — T0° ; at 500 fathoms — OA0 ; at 400, — 0‘5° ;
at 300, 4-3°; at 200, 8‘8° ; at 100, 9*4°; surface 1L6°, air 12-0°.

Hauls were also made with the closing-net, and sail was then made
for Orkney, and on August 20 the ship was brought to her
anchorage in Swanbister Bay, thus terminating the cruise of 1903.

24 Cruise of 1903 from Valentia to the Faeroe Hanks and Orkney

Although the closing-net was used many times, and numerous
water samples were taken on this cruise, the weather could not he
said to have been favourable for work, being frequently very stormy,
and with but few fine days. This, though interfering with work
with the closing-net, did not hinder the collection of a continuous
series of temperature observations or the collection of water samples
from deep water.

EXTRACTS FROM THE LOG OF THE 1904 CRUISE.

The first station visited in 1904, on June 20, was situated in Lat. Station l.
50° 57' N. and Long. 11° 41/ W., within a few miles of Station Ed
of 1903. After leaving Newlmven (Sussex) on June 10, three very
tine and calm days were experienced, and on the fourth day the Lizard
was passed, with a tine breeze from the south-west. When nearing Cape
Clear, on June 14, a very severe storm sprang up, accompanied with
a very heavy sea ; at 6 o’clock it was necessary to take in a single
reef, and at 9 a double reef, and heave to. On June Id the sea was
so had as to necessitate running into Bantry Bay for shelter. This
weather lasted until the 17th. Moderating on the 18th, hut with the
wind still fresh, the ship proceeded to sea again at 9 p.m., and after
running by the patent log 133 miles, an attempt was made to work the
station. A sounding gave 858 fathoms, with a bottom of globigerina
ooze. As soon as it was possible to do any work, the closing-net was
put down to 800 fathoms, and a very fair haul was made, followed by
hauls at dOO, 400, 200, 100, and 50 fathoms, a fair amount of stuff being
obtained at each haul, and temperature observations at the same
depth. Leaving this station at d p.m., Station 2, Lat. 50° 25' N., station 2.
Long. 12° 38' W., was reached at 4 a.m. on June 21, and the wind and
sea having moderated, though leaving a strong swell, the closing-net
was put down to 1,200 fathoms, 1,000, 700, 300, and 100 fathoms, and
fair hauls obtained. Temperatures were also taken, and samples for
gas analysis.

Here it was found that the new engine, put on board at consider-
able trouble and delay, failed. When 500 fathoms of wire were out,
an experimental trial was made to raise the closing-net. Failure
necessitated hauling on board by hand with such help as could be got

25 4

26

Extracts from the IjOg of the 1904 Cruise

Station £

Station

from the steam-winch. This took four hours to accomplish. Hence-
forth the old steam capstan and winch were therefore employed, and
the net lowered to 1,200 fathoms. The raising on board by this
means only occupied forty minutes. For the rest of the cruise being
compelled to use the old tackle, limited the depth at which it could be
employed to 1,600 fathoms. This was very annoying, as it was con-
fidently hoped before starting that we should be able to make tow-net
observations down to 2,000 fathoms ; but it would have delayed the
cruise too long to return to land for repairs and new appliances.
Water and gas samples were also taken at this station.

On June 23, 1904, in position Lat. 49° 50' N., Long. 13° 31' W., the
tow-net was used down to 600 fathoms, the lowest depth at which it was
possible to work the net satisfactorily. A fresh breeze having sprung
up, with a falling barometer and a westerly wind, it was a case of beating
to windward all nigbt, and at 4 a.m., on June 24, the next station, in
Lat. 49° O' N. and Long. 1 4° 36' W., was reached, and the net lowered to
1,000 fathoms. While it was down the wind shifted to south-west, and
the ship rolling badly in the trough of the sea, the net came up again with
a kink in the wire at 35 fathoms above the frame. This had evidently
occurred after the opening messenger had gone down, as the net was
open, and the closing messenger was stopped by the kink in the wire.
Taking out the kink, the net was again lowered to 1,000 fathoms, and
this time came up with a kink in the same place, and both messengers
arrested in it. The net had therefore never opened, and it was
necessary to cut off the 35 fathoms below the kink. Incidentally it
furnished evidence of the perfection of the opening and closing
arrangements. From 4 a.m. to 10 a.m. was, therefore, so much
wasted time, but a third attempt to use the net at. 1,000 fathoms was
rewarded by success. As there was a good deal of swell in the sea,
not much came up in the net. Put down again to 800 fathoms, this
time on raising it the cod end of the silk net was split, and all the
contents had escaped. After repairing, it was sent down to the same
depth, and this time the haul was successful. Hauls at 600, 400, and
200 fathoms were all that could now be done in deep water, the wind

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

27

having backed to south and freshening, along with rain, which came
down very heavily at last.

After a dirty night of rain and a heavy sea, at 6 a.m. the next Station 5.
station was reached in Lat. 48°27'N., Long. 15° 38' W. It was 8 a.m.
before the wind and sea had moderated enough to allow of work com-
mencing. Then the water-bottle was lowered to 1,570 fathoms, and
seven water samples and fourteen samples for gas analysis were
taken, and the closing-net was put down to 1,400 fathoms. It took
fifty minutes to haul it up again, and it had opened and shut quite
satisfactorily.

Continuing the course through the night, Station 6, in Lat. 48° 12' N., station 6.
Long. 16° 26' W., was reached, and the ship laid to at 8 a.m., only
30 miles from the last station, and with the sea rather rough and a
long, heavy swell from the west, the closing-net was lowered to
1,500 fathoms. Hauling up occupied an hour, and though the net
appeared to have worked quite properly, there was very little in it. A
second attempt at the same depth was no more successful, the entire
contents being a few Copepoda and a small Medusa. It was then
lowered to 1,200 fathoms and towed for fifteen minutes, with no better
result. At 900 fathoms there was a little more, and at 700 fathoms
a similar result ; at 500 fathoms the haul was much better, and at
400 fathoms it was very successful. The unsuccessful results of the
hauls from 500 to 1,500 fathoms were probably due to the heavy
swell, which, causing the net to ride up and down, is unfavourable for
tow-netting. That the net had been at the proper depths was indicated
by the temperatures of the thermometers attached to the frame, viz.,

1,500 fathoms, 3T° C. ; 12,000, 3'5° C. ; 900, 4’2° C. ; 700, 6’4° C. ;

500, 8-5° C. ; 400, 9-4° C. ; 200, 10-2° C. ; 100, 10-5° C. ; 0, 14-5° C.

On .June 28, 1904, Station 7 was reached at Lat. 47° 28' N., Long, station 7.
17° 07' W. , after a long beat to windward, with thick fog and a very
heavy westerly swell ; and after waiting hove-to for some hours in hopes
that wind and sea would go down, an attempt was made to use the
tow-net. After having lowered to 1,500 fathoms, and commencing to
heave up, the flange on the winch, which keeps the wire on the drum,

28

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

suddenly gave way. In danger of losing the whole tackle, the device
was hit upon by Buchan Henry of winding a length of stout rope on
the drum of the winch and driving some long spikes through the rope
into the drum. This saved the situation, which for a few minutes was
serious, the loss of 1,500 fathoms of wire, the heavy closing-net, and a
couple of thermometers being too dreadful to contemplate. However,
the device succeeded admirably, and the net, when hauled up, was
found to contain a good haul ; at 1,000 fathoms the haul was similarly
successful. At 700 fathoms there was not much taken in the net, and
the temperature at this depth was 1° C. colder than at any of the
stations of corresponding depth previously worked ; at 500 and
400 fathoms the hauls were very poor — scarcely anything in the net —
and the temperature was also below normal ; and at 200 and
100 fathoms the hauls were of no value. This station is 360 miles
from the starting-place — viz., Ireland — and all the time the wind was

station 8. right ahead, except for one day. On June 29, after a long beat to
windward, at noon, the position was found to be Lat. 46° 40' N., Long.
17° 09' W. — far enough to the south, but not to the west. The sea was
much too bad for work with the closing-net, but water samples were
collected from 1,200 fathoms upwards. The water-bottle can be used
when it would lie fruitless or folly to attempt work with the closing-
nets. The thermometer showed that at this station the cold wedge of
water previously referred to had been left behind, the temperature at
1,200 fathoms being 3'8° C. ; at 900, 54)° C. ; at 600, 9‘0° C. ; at 200,
10-6° C. ; at 100, 11-0° C.

station 9. Just after finishing the last station a gale sprang up from west-north-
west, which lasted for three days, and the ship lay close-reefed until
on July 2, in Lat. 45° 6' N., Long. 18° 14' W., at 4 a.m. the sea had
moderated sufficiently to permit the resumption of work. The closing-
net was therefore put down to 1,500 fathoms, but when hauled up
contained nothing ; at 1,200 fathoms there was a good haul, and at
1 ,000 fathoms a smaller haul than the last. At 800 fathoms the haul was
very good, although the temperature was very low, over 1°C. less than
at the corresponding depth at any previous station. At 600 fathoms

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

29

the haul was good, the temperature being about 2° C. below normal.
At 500 fathoms the temperature had risen 1 ‘5° C. in 100 fathoms.
Before noon rain commenced to fall in torrents, but at noon an
observation showed the ship to be just 100 miles south-west of the
last station (June 29). At 400 and 200 fathoms the hauls were
unsuccessful ; at the former depth the net was found to have turned
inside out.

At 4 a.m. on July 3 Station 10 was reached in Lat. 44° 41' N.,
Long. 19° 08' W., after a dirty night of wind and rain, necessitating
reduction of canvas. From 4 a.m. to 8 a.m. it was impossible to do
any work, the ship being simply hove to, but at 8 a.m., with the
weather a little better, the water-bottle was lowered to 1,500 fathoms,
and samples were taken at that depth, also 1,300, 1,100, 900, 700, 500,
300, and 100 fathoms. Work with the closing-net was impossible.
With the exception of one fine day at Station 2, the sea had
been unfavourable since the commencement of the cruise for tow-
netting.

With a light, fair wind during the night, and the sea gradually
subsiding, a passage of fifty miles was made, and Station 11, in
Lat. 44° 13' N., Long. 20° 05' W., was reached, and work commenced
by lowering the closing-net to 1,500 fathoms at 8 a.m. With the most
favourable conditions the net did not capture much plankton at this
depth, nor at 1,200 fathoms, but the haul at 1,000 fathoms was good,
also at 800, 600, 400, 200, and 100 fathoms. The weather on this day
was perfect, a light northerly breeze and gentle swell. With a very light
westerly breeze throughout the night, progress was slow, and at noon
on July 5 the position was only thirty-four miles from the last station.
The weather still being all that could be desired, it was decided to take
serial temperatures down to 2,000 fathoms, and consequently the ship
was hove to (Station 12) in Lat. 44° 5' N., Long. 20° 34' W. The
observations were as follows :

Station

10.

Station

11.

Station

12.

30

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

Station

13.

Station

14.

Temperature of air=17'6° C.

Temperature at —
0 fathom

... 16-0° C.

Temperature at —
900 fathoms

4-2° C.

25

fathoms

... 14-0° C.

1,000

55 * * *

3-9° C.

50

55

... 12-7° C.

1,100

55

3-6° C.

75

55

... 11-6° C.

1,200

55

3-6° C.

100

55

... 11-4° C.

1,300

55

3-6° C.

200

55

... 10-5° C.

1,400

55

3-5° C.

300

55

9-8° C.

1,500

55

3T° C.

400

55

... 8-8° C.

1,600

55

3-0° C.

500

55

... 7-6° C.

1,700

55

3-0° C.

600

55

... 6-4° C.

1 ,800

55

3-0° C.

700

55

... 5-4° C,

1,900

55

2-8° C.

800

55

... 4-5° C,

2,000

55

2-7° C.

The distance from

Fayal was now

500 miles.

The evening

ended in

almost dead calm, the little breeze there was being from south-west,
and the barometer high, 30‘2, and steady.

At noon on July 6 the position was Lat. 43° 42' N., Long. 21° 18' W.,
just forty-six miles from the last station, the sea dead calm, and every-
thing most favourable for work with the closing-net, and it was with
deep annoyance that it was discovered that the opening piston of the net
was broken. Two hours’ delay was occasioned while this was repaired
by screwing both pieces together, and the net was lowered to
1,500 fathoms. It was with considerable surprise when the net came
up that it was seen to have been trailing over the bottom, and the
contents of the net were only a little fine, white sand and a small jet-
black stone. The chart gives no soundings hereabouts, but at the last
station, only forty-six miles away, 2,000 fathoms of wire was lowered
without finding bottom, so that striking bottom here at 1,500 fathoms
was quite unexpected. Plankton hauls at 1,000 and at 600 fathoms were
successful. There was fog all day, with occasional drizzle, and a sight
of the sun only for a few minutes at noon.

A fresh breeze springing up from the north-east, Station 14 was
reached at 8 a.m., in Lat. 43° IP N., Long. 22° 27' W., and sound-
ing at 1,600 fathoms, no bottom was reached. Evidently the compara-
tively shallower water of the last station had been left behind. Other

31

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cridse

soundings in this locality would he of interest to determine the area
of this comparatively shallow water, but unfortunately the Silver Belle
had so much work to accomplish that it was impossible to delay for
the purpose of investigating this matter. The sea getting rougher as
the day went on, and the swell increasing, made it quite unfavourable
for tow-net work, consequently the hauls at 1,500 and 1,200 fathoms
were very poor. At 900 and 700 fathoms, however, a lot of stuff was
obtained, and a still greater quantity at 200 fathoms. This day the
ship was just about 400 miles from Horta, over 700 from Bantry Bay,
and since July 2 a station had been done every day. A strong breeze
from north-north-east put the ship at Station 15 in Lat. 42° 3 7 ' N., Station
and Long. 23° 35' W. At 6 a.m. on July 8 the swell was too great
for the closing-net, consequently only water samples were taken from
1,500 fathoms upwards.

The wind lasted all night, from the same quarter, and Station 16, Station
in Lat. 41° 58' N., Long. 24° 44' W., was reached at 6 a.m. next
day, July 9. The sea was, however, running rather high, and not
very favourable for tow-netting, but the net was put down to 1,500
and 1,200 fathoms, with pretty good success at the latter, also at 700
and 500, 400, and 300 fathoms. With a light breeze during the night,
a course of fifty-three miles was run by 6 a.m. on July 10, and Station 17 station
reached in Lat. 41° 13' N., Long. 25° 18' W. Being a perfect day1
for work with closing-nets, a light breeze and gentle swell from the
north-east, the line was ‘ plumb ’ straight with the net at 1,500 fathoms,
and the haul at that depth very good, also at 1,300, 1,000, 900,

700, 500, 300, and 100 fathoms. All these hauls were successful. In
conditions favourable for tow-netting, there is not the slightest doubt
that a considerable amount of animal plankton can be nearly always
obtained in the tow-nets to at least 1,500 fathoms’ depth, refuting
Agassiz’s contention of an azoic zone in the ocean, which, however,
has been sufficiently disproved already.

During the night, with very light wind, the ship ran between thirty and station
forty miles, and at 6 a.m. Station 18, Lat. 40° 35' N., Long. 25° 54' W., 15
was reached. It was not intended to make a station here, but as the

32

Extracts from the I.og of the 1904 Cruise

Station

19.

Station

20.

Station

21.

barometer was falling, and there was every evidence of a ‘ blow ’
coming on, it was thought better to take advantage of the opportunity
for work before the weather prevented it. The closing-net was
therefore put down to 1,500 fathoms and a fairly good haul obtained,
and a pretty good one at 1,000 fathoms, though the wind was rising
all the time ; and when the net was put down next to 600 fathoms, the
sea was very choppy, and so increasingly bad did it become that when
the net was next put down to 300 fathoms it came up torn about
8 inches across.

The night turned out very ‘ dirty,’ with rain in torrents and a
strong gale commencing from the north-west and blowing ‘ great guns ’
finally from the north. At 2 a.m. the cringle in the clew of the main-
sail burst, but fortunately nothing was lost. Arriving at Station 19,
July 12, in Lat. 39° 53' N., Long. 26° 32' W., a sounding unexpectedly
gave only 488 fathoms, with a bottom of hard rock. Putting down
the triangle-net, a mixed collection of sand shells, zoophytes, sponges,
and echinoderms were brought up, but on the second descent of this
net the frame was firmly jammed in the rocky bottom, and it, together
with 100 fathoms of hemp-rope, were lost. Drifting all the time in a
south-east direction, about three miles farther on gave a sounding of
600 fathoms. The bank which gave the sounding 488 fathoms is
uncharted. Towards the south-east it deepens rapidly, and is possibly
shallower water to the north-west.

During the niidit there was a liffht breeze from the north-north- west,
and at daylight on July 13, Terceira hove in sight, bearing south-west
by south, and about eighteen miles distant. Heaving to, a sounding gave
870 fathoms, and at 800 fathoms a good haul was made with the closing-
net. A fresh breeze was now blowing with a bright sun, and Terceira lay
about sixteen miles to windward, a white cloud of mist hanging over the
highest hill. At 600 fathoms there was a good haul with the closing-
net, but at 400 and 200 fathoms very little was obtained. Sounding
in Lat. 38° 42' N., Long. 28° 21' W., gave a depth of 770 fathoms, with
a bottom of fine volcanic mud, and the ship then put in and anchored
in Horta Harbour, thus completing the first portion of her cruise, and

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

38

here she remained for one week, while various overhauls were made
and stores renewed, etc.

On July 22, 1904, Horta was left behind after a week’s stay, during Station
which time the gear was thoroughly overhauled. In Lat. 38° 15' N.
and Long. 28° 32' W. , a sounding gave 472 fathoms, with a bottom
of volcanic mud and sand. The closing-net was also used from
450 fathoms upwards. A very light breeze, lasting throughout the
night, was against good sailing, but when at daylight on the next day
forty miles had been run from the last station, a sounding was made in Station
Lat. 37° 42' N., Long. 27° 37' W., and 1,000 fathoms of wire run out
without reaching bottom. At this depth, and at 800, 600, 400, 200,
and 100 fathoms, hauls were made with the closing-net. A brisk
wind sprang up from the north-west, and on July 24 at 7 a.m. the ship
was hove to in Lat. 37° 15' N. and Lons’. 26° 14' W., where a sounding Station
gave 1,400 fathoms. The closing-net was put down to 1,400 fathoms,
but with the drifting of the ship the water had become shallower, the
net had been trailing on the bottom, kinks had got in the wire, and,
worse than all, the piston of the net had become bent. Consequently
the net had never opened, the messenger having stuck on the kinks.

The best part of the day was spent in repairs to the piston, therefore
the day was devoted to the collection of water samples from
1,200 fathoms upwards. A nice breeze from the north, lasting all station
night, put the ship in Lat. 36° 54' N. and Long. 24° 56' W. early on
July 25, and a sounding gave 865 fathoms, with bottom of mud and
sand. Hauls with the closim>'-net were made at 600, 500, 400, 200,
and 100 fathoms. At 7.30 next morning Station 26 was reached station
in Lat. 36° 18' N., Long. 23° 53' W., and the closing-net was put J'~
down to 1,600, 1,400, 1,000, 700, 500, 300, and 100 fathoms ; at
night the hot, calm day was succeeded by a strong westerly breeze, station
necessitating shortening sail ; at 8 a.m. on July 27 Lat. 35° 48' N., '

Long. 22° 35' W., was reached, and the closing-net was put down to
1,600 fathoms, and afterwards to 1,200, 900, 600, 400, 200, and
100 fathoms. All the time the wind was rising and the swell pretty
sharp, so that the results of the day’s work were disappointing.

34

Extracts from the I.og of the 1904 Cruise

Station

28.

Station

29.

Station

80.

Station

31.

Station

32.

Station

33.

A fresh wind lasted throughout the night, and early on July 28
Station 28 was reached in Lat. 25° 04' N., Long. 21° 18' W., and
water samples were taken at every 200 fathoms from 1,400 fathoms
upwards. A strong southerly current ran here, so strong that, although
with afresh to strong west-south- west breeze, the wire stood right under
the ship’s bottom. With a fresh breeze lasting all night, Lat. 34° 22' 1ST.,
Long. 20° 06' W., was reached at 7 a.m., and the closing-net was put
down to 1,000, 800, and successively every 100 fathoms to the
surface. Coming along at a line pace throughout the night with
a good north-east breeze, at 5 a.m. the ship was at Lat. 33° 37' N. and
Long. 19° 00' W., and the closing-net was put down to 800 and each
100 fathoms to surface. Two turtles kept round the yacht all day,
and one of the crew harpooned one of them through the neck and had
it fast for some time, when it broke awav and disappeared. On
July 31, in Lat. 32° 55' N. and Long. 17° 48' W., with Madeira
bearing south-east twenty-nine miles away, a sounding at 1,400 fathoms
gave no bottom, though the temperature was 3° C. Probably not very
far from bottom, the closing-net was put down to 1,200, 1,000, 700,
500, and then each 100 fathoms to surface. Then way was made for
Funchal.

Here live days was occupied cleaning up and overhauling tackle, a
new chain- wheel having; to be cast for the winch. After leaving and
lying becalmed outside Funchal for several hours until dark, a fresh
head breeze sprang up, and at 5 a.m. the station in Lat. 32° 41' N.,
Long. 16° 36' W., was reached on August 7, and in 60 fathoms an
attempt was made to dredge, but, the bottom being very rocky, the
hauls were not very successful, chiefly shells and coral, most of the
latter in the tangles.

Beating to windward all night, at 8 a.m. on August 8 the ship was
brought to in Lat. 32° 57' N., Long. 15° 23' W., for the purpose of
tow-netting, but though the day was bright and clear, there was too
great a swell to lower the net to great depths. However, from
600 fathoms to surface, at intervals of 100 fathoms, the hauls of the
closing-net were pretty successful. At 6 a.m. the next day (August 9)

Extracts from the Log of the 1004 Cruise

35

the next station was reached in Lat. 33° 18' and Long. 14° 10' W.
A tine bright day, with fresh breeze from the N., and a heavy swell,
too great for successful working of the closing-net ; water samples
and temperatures only were taken, down to 1,600 fathoms.

Making for the next station, in Lat. 33° 45' N., Long. 13° 03' W.,
good progress was made until midnight, when a heavy squall from
north-north- east compelled a shortening of sail. The station was
reached at 8 a.m., and with a very heavy swell from the north-east,
the attempts to nse the closing-net at 1,000 and at 800 fathoms were
not very successful, though the net evidently had worked perfectly.
At 500 fathoms, and successive hauls to the surface, there was more
stuff, but on the whole the hauls were comparatively poor.

On August 11, at 8 a.m., the next station was reached in
Lat. 34° 16' and Long. 11° 57' W., with a nice little breeze all night
from the north. At this station the temperatures were remarkable,
being at 600 fathoms 10*8°, and from 500 to 300 fathoms identical —
viz., 11-1°.

250 fathoms ... ... ... 1 1*7°.

300 „ 11-2°.

350 „ 11 T°.

400 „ ... 11-1°.

500 „ 1 LT°.

Being usually about 2° of difference at each of these depths, it
was thought that possibly the thermometer had not been down long-
enough, but on being lowered a second time and kept in situ for ten
minutes, the result was exactly the same. The occurrence of this
wedge of warm water was peculiar.

On August 12, after a very light wind, this station, Lat. 34° 12' N.,
Long. 11° 05' W., forty-four miles from the last, was reached, and
tow-nettings made with the closing-net at every 100 fathoms upwards
from 500, and temperature observations from 1,200 fathoms. The
temperature at 500 fathoms is here seen to be nearly a degree lower
than at the last station, the wedge of warm water evidently less thick.

On August 13 this station was reached, in Lat. 34° 43' N., Long.

Station

34.

Station

35.

Station

30.

Station

37.

Station

38.

36

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

Station

39.

Station

40.

Station

41.

Station

42.

Station

43.

9° 38' W., at 10 a. m., and the water-bottle was put down to 1,600
fathoms, and samples taken from there to the surface at every
200 fathoms. Here a current was found to be going east, and the ship
was eleven miles farther east than was expected. The temperatures
from 100 to 1,200 fathoms were higher than they were at the last
station, except at 400 fathoms, where it was 10‘7°, as compared with
11T° at the last station.

August 14 was one of the most unsatisfactory days of the cruise, a
strong breeze from the north-north-east all night having rendered the sea
quite unsatisfactory for tow-netting, the ship rolling almost scuppers
under ; and though the closing-net was lowered to 500 fathoms, and
afterwards to 300, 200, and 100, the attempt to do work might as well
never have been made. The position of the station was Lat. 35° 16' N.,
Long. 8° 47' W. Temperature observations were taken to a depth of
500 fathoms.

After a rough sea all night, wind and sea, however, going down
gradually, at 6 a.m. it was sufficiently improved to commence work
at this station, in Lat. 35° 55' N., Long. 7° 33' W. A sounding gave
770 fathoms, and the closing- net was put down to 700 fathoms, and
worked with success at successive depths of 100 fathoms to the
surface. After a tine night and light fair wind, the next station was
reached in Lat. 35° 55' N., Long. 6° 35' W., at 6 a.m. on August 16,
and a sounding gave 337 fathoms, and water samples were taken as
usual, and the closing-net put down to 300, 200, and 100 fathoms, with
successful results.

Before making for Gibraltar, on August 17, Lat. 35° 55' N.,
Long. 5° 54' W., a sounding was made in 172 fathoms, and water
samples taken at 100, 50, and 25 fathoms, and the closing-net lowered
to 170 fathoms. Unfortunately, half of the closing messenger became
detached and lost, and further work was relinquished, and way made
for Gibraltar.

After five days’ stay at Gibraltar, work was recommenced on
August 21 at station Lat. 36° 00' N. and Long. 5° 21' W., where a
sounding crave 500 fathoms. While hauling on board the wire

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

37

snapped about 12 fathoms from the surface, and away went not only
the sounding-lead, but one of our best thermometers. Samples of
water were taken at every 100 fathoms, and tubes filled for analysis.
The strong current and wind, both in one direction, took the ship
rapidly eastwards. The closing-net was put down, and good hauls
made from 360, 300, 200, and 100 fathoms.

On August 22, with a nice light breeze from west, and strong current
going south-south-east, the ship was hove to in Lat. 35° 45' N., Long.
3° 41' W., and a sounding made in 840 fathoms grey ooze ; and water
and gas samples were taken from 800 fathoms. Then it was necessary
to crowd on all sail to sail down the current, which was taking the ship
fast to the south-east. The water-bottle sent down to 700 fathoms
just touched bottom, but the sail enabled the ship to keep her ground
better, so that it was possible to take water and gas samples from
600 fathoms at successive hundreds to the surface. Tow-nettings
were also made at 600, 500, 400, 300, 200, and 100 fathoms, all with
excellent results. Leaving this station on August 22, and after
beating to windward against wind and current all night and next day,
at 8 p.m. only ahead of Gibraltar, the anchor was dropped at 8 a.m.
next morning at Tarifa for three hours, the wind having entirely
dropped. A nice breeze from the west springing up, the ship lay over
to leeward of Tangiers, which was reached at 3 p.m., when again it
fell calm, and, dodging close to the rocks to keep out of the tide for
fear of getting carried back through the straits, at 6 p.m. a breeze
sprang up. Dodging about under Cape Spartel until daylight, at
6 a.m., a sounding gave 250 fathoms, Lat. 35° 53' N., Long. 5° 52' W. ;
gas and water samples were taken here. The notes recorded here
give an idea of the difficulty of navigating the straits in a sailing-ship.
The day the Silver Belle left Gibraltar three barques were passed
dodging to the east of Gibraltar, waiting for wind to get to the west-
ward, and when the yacht returned three days after they were
still there !

Lying most of August 25 becalmed, sometimes gaining, sometimes
losing ground, a smart breeze from the east at last carried the ship

Station

44.

Station

45.

Station

40.

38

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

Station

47.

Station

48.

Station

49.

Station

50.

along to the next station, and on August 26, at noon, the position was
Lat. 36° 13' N., Long. 7° 47' W., a sounding giving 601 fathoms, with
bottom of tine grey sand. After the closing-net had been used at
600 fathoms, the rising wind and sea hindered successful work at
higher depths. Up to midnight a nice sailing breeze had assisted,
when it dropped to a light air from the south-east. At 8 a. m. the
position Lat. 36° 17' N. and Long. 9° 01' W. was reached, when good
hauls were made with the closing-net from 1 ,000, 800, 600, 400, 300,
200, and 100 fathoms.

Beating to windward all day after the finish of work, with light wind
from north-north-west, without making much headway, at 6 a.m. on
August 29 the position Lat. 36° 37' N., Long. 10° 05' W., was reached,
and a good haul of stuff made with the closing-net at 1,600 fathoms ;
also at 1,300, 1,000, 700, 500, and each 100 fathoms to surface.
The day was perfect for the work, and just sufficient of a light breeze
to keep sufficient tow on the net. The temperatures at this station
are puzzling — a difference of 8^° between 50 fathoms and the surface,
only between 200 and 700, and 5JU between 700 and 1,000 fathoms.
This day two butterflies were captured (fifty miles from land), and a
grasshopper floating on a bit of seaweed.

With a dead beat to windward all night and forenoon, the next
station was reached on August 30, in Lat. 37° 14' N., Long. 10° 37' W.,
and the closing-net was put down to 1,000, 800, 600, 400, 200, and
100 fathoms.

Close-hauled, with a fine fresh breeze from north-north-east all night
and morning, at noon on August 31 the position was Lat. 37° 58' N.,
Long. 11° 58' W., and the closing-net was put down to 1,100 fathoms,
then to 900, 700, 500, 300, and 100, with good results, though the sea
was rather choppy. On completion of this work a course north and
west was taken. A few fine showers of rain to-day were the first rain
for two months. Close-hauled on the starboard tack all nio-ht and next

O

morning, with a strong breeze from nortli-north-east and very choppy
sea, the ship was at noon in position Lat. 38° 53" N., Long. 13° 12' W.
The net was lowered to 500 fathoms, but there was quite sufficient

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

39

angle on the wire, and the net received too many jerks to work with
satisfaction. However, hauls, though only small, were made at
400, 300, 200, and 100 fathoms. All night was a continual beat to
windward, with a strong gale of wind from the north-north-east, and at
10 a.m. on September 3 the position was Lat. 39° 42' N., Long.
10° 53' W. Notwithstanding the sea the net was lowered to 1,000,
800, 600, 400, and 200 fathoms, and at the latter depth the severe
jerking of the net resulted in tearing the silk net, which prevented
further work.

Over a week of gales and head-winds prevented great progress, but
did not prevent the regular taking of temperatures or the lowering of
the closing-net.

Towards midnight the wind lessened, but kept in the same quarter,
viz., north-north-east, and at 7 a.m. on September 4 it fell to calm, the
position being Lat. 40° 03' N., Long. 12° 13' W. Water samples
were taken from 1,600, 1,400, 1,200, 1,000, 800, 600, 400, 200, and 100
fathoms, and the necessity of replacing the silk net with a new one
prevented the use of the closing-net at this station.

Lying on the starboard tack all night, the wind dropped at mid-
night, but stayed continually in the north-north-east. At 7 a.m. it
was almost calm, and the position being Lat. 40° 03' N., Long.
12° 13' W., the water-bottle was put down to 1,600, 1,400, 1,200,
1,000, 800, 600, 400, 200, and 100 fathoms. Towards afternoon tine
showers of rain fell, with very light wind, still in the north-north-east.

Becalmed until 10 p.m., a light breeze then sprang up from south-
west, and for the first time in nine days was the ship enabled to keep
a course. At 2 p.m. the position was Lat. 41° 10' N., Long. 11° 46' W.,
and it was intended to work with the closing-net, but just as the ship
was hove-to a sudden squall came on from the north-north- west,
accompanied with a very sharp swell. The closing-net was therefore
only put down to 500 fathoms, then to 400 and 300 fathoms, the sea
getting worse all the time ; the vessel rolling very heavily, it was
unsafe to use the closing-net any further. Probably a heavy storm
out westward caused all this sea.

Station

51.

Station

52.

Station

53.

Station

54.

40

Extracts from the I.og of the 1904 Cruise

Station

55.

Station

56.

Station

57.

Station

58.

Beating to windward, with a light breeze, north by east, and an extra-
ordinarily heavy swell from west-north- west, at 7 a.m. the next position,
Lat. 43° 27' N., Long. 10° 19' W., was reached. The sea had somewhat
lessened, and laying the ship’s head into it, she was hove to, and the
closing-net was lowered to 1,500, 1,200, 1,000, 800, 600, 400, 200, and
100 fathoms with very good results. Shortly after leaving this station
the wind backed to north-north-east, and a very heavy swell continued
from the north-west. On the port tack all night, about east-north-east,
at noon next day the position was Lat. 42° 01/ N., Long. 10° 48' W.
About as bad a day as could well be for such work, the net was lowered
to 1,000 fathoms, and while it was down the ship made two or three
fearful rolls, with the result that a kink got into the wire 164 fathoms
from the net, and several strands of the wire were broken. It was
really not tit to attempt work with closing -nets in deep water. This
portion had to be cut off, and the net was then lowered to 800, 600,
400, 200, and 100 fathoms, the results being quite successful.

Making for the next position with a nice breeze from the west-north-
west, Lat. 44° 35' N., Long. 9° 52' W., just when the net was being
lowered the wind shifted to north-north-east, blowing a strong breeze.
However, the closing-net was successfully lowered to 1,500, 1,200, and
1,000 fathoms. Meanwhile the wind was continually rising and the
ship rolling very heavily, and presently a dense fog came on. At
600 fathoms there was a good haul, also at 400, 200, and 100 fathoms.
The afternoon closed down ‘ dirty,’ blowing hard right ahead north-
north-east, with tine drizzle. The impression derived from the hauls
at this locality is that there is much more life in deep water than
farther out westwards, as, on the outward trip to the Azores, with
better weather and everything in favour of good working of the net,
the hauls from the deeper water were much smaller.

With a strong breeze from north-north-east to east-north-east
all night, at noon next day the position was Lat. 45° 19' N., Long.
10° 20' W. The sea being very disturbed, the closing-net could only
with safety be lowered to 500 fathoms, subsequently to 400, 300, 200,
and 100, and here the half of the closing messenger was lost.

Extracts from the Log of the 1904 Cruise

41

A 4 dirty ’ nio-ht followed tliis day with a a:ood deal of wind and
rain, but at 7 a.m. the position Lat. 47° 02' N., Long. 9° 10' W. , was
reached, and, heaving to, the net was put down to 1,000 fathoms, and
at this depth and at 800 fathoms good hauls were obtained. While
the net was down at 600 fathoms, the wind hauled round and put the
ship in the trough of the sea, rolling her dreadfully for a short time,
with the result that the closing messenger would not go down, owing to
a kink in the wire, which had four strands completely broken, and the
heavy net was held by only thin strands. Another 54 fathoms of wire
had to be cut off'. Further hauls were taken at 400, 200, and 100
fathoms.

A strong wind and rising sea, ending four hours later in a strong gale,
west-north- west, with high sea and very heavy squalls, prevented any
further work. The bad weather continued throughout September 13,
at 9.30 p.m. of which day the Lizard light was abeam. Plymouth was
reached oh Wednesday, September 14, when the ship was brought
to anchor, and the voyage concluded so far as scientific work was
concerned.

On this cruise, lasting from June 20 (the first station) to
September 12 (the day the ship was anchored in Plymouth Sound),
300 hauls were made with the closing-net, over 650 temperature
observations and 150 water samples were collected, besides many
hauls of plankton taken with surface-nets and midwater net, and
vacuum tubes were filled with sea-water for subsequent analysis.
Except when in port in the Azores, at Madeira, and Gibraltar, not a
single day passed without some scientific work being accomplished.

Sixty hauls of plankton were made with the closing-net at or
below a depth of 1,000 fathoms, and seventy -six hauls between 500
and 1,000 fathoms. If open vertical nets had been employed, probably
greater hauls of stuff would have been obtained ; but the object was
not to obtain a large amount of material so much as data for deter-
mining the vertical distribution of plankton.

Station

59.

Station

CO.

6

THE LOG OF THE CRUISE OF 1905—1906.

It was intended to start in September, 1905, to make a cruise from the
Irish Channel to Madeira. However, one delay after another occurred
in fitting out the ship, and it was not until November 1 that the Silver
Belle was able to sail out of Dublin Bay. The object of this cruise
was to visit some of the deep-water stations upon which work was
done in the previous year, to take water samples at these temperatures,
and samples of water for gas analysis, to compare with the results of
the previous year, which had shown some rather extraordinary pheno-
mena (referred to in Dr. H. N. Dickson’s report), and to determine
whether these were constant and repeated in the year 1905, or merely
accidental. On this occasion it was not intended to use the tow-net
to collect plankton (indeed, my own special tow-net was in use by
Mr. Stanley Gardiner in the Indian Ocean), but trawling gear was
included in the outfit, with the intention of making trawling observa-
tions where circumstances permitted. In the equipment of trawl I was
fortunate in obtaining a good deal of excellent advice from my friend
Mr. Holt, of the Irish Fishery Board.

In addition, opportunity was taken, wdien it occurred, to use the
current meter, which was kindly sent to me by Professor Pettersson
from Stockholm, and I really hoped to be able to make some interesting
observations with this instrument. However, the weather throughout
the cruise was so very unfavourable that it was impossible to employ
the current meter, except on very few occasions, and these will be
referred to later on. Probably it is rare to experience such weather,
even in the Bay of Biscay, as predominated at the close of the year
1905, a succession of violent storms impeding work throughout the

42

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

43

whole of the outward cruise to Madeira ; and the early months of 1906
were extremely stormy for the Mediterranean.

At the mouth of the English Channel a station was selected twenty
miles south-west of Parson’s Bank, which would join up these observa-
tions to those made by the International Fisheries investigations.
Here the sounding gave 90 fathoms, and water and gas samples were
taken. Here the temperature was found to he a little colder at the
surface and at the bottom than at 10 fathoms, the lower temperature
at the surface probably being due to the cold north-west wind which
had prevailed for several days.

With a light breeze from north-west by west, close hauled, a
course was made for the next station, 130 miles distant, which was not
reached until November 14. After leaving the Parson’s Bank station
the tine weather disappeared, and very rough weather set in. The old
Station 59 was reached on Thursday, November 9, but it was far too
rough to do any work. The ship dodged round this station for two
clays, waiting for an opportunity to do work ; but on the Saturday the
storm broke very severely, necessitating double reefs, and on Sunday
morning it was necessary to take in three reefs and stow the foresail.
AH night it blew a whole gale, but the ship la}' to like a duck, but on
Monday morning the fourth reef had to be taken in, and storm-jib set,
and at noon the port gangway was lost. At 4 a.m. on the Tuesday
the sea was fearful, and the mainsail burst. However, the storm
subsequently began to subside, and by ten o’clock it was possible to
take water samples from 1,000 fathoms upwards, the sea gradually
going down.

On Wednesday, November 17, the ship was near the old Station 56,
in Lat. 43° 32' N., Long. 10° 48' W., but as soon as arriving at this
locality had to heave to with a strong gale blowing from north-east for
forty hours, with a very heavy sea, before wind and .sea abated enough
to allow of any work. Water samples were taken from 1,200 fathoms
upwards. The surface temperature was this day 1|° warmer than
at the last station. The wind then began to rise again, and it was
necessary to run with double-reefed mainsail, reefed foresail, and
small jib.

Nov. 8,
1905.

20 miles
S.W. of
Parson’s
Bank.

Nov. 14,
1905.
Lat. 45°
•37' N.,
Long. 8°
20' W.

Nov. 17,
1905.

Lat. 43°
32' N.,
Long. 10°
48' W.

6—2

44

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

After leaving this station a fresh breeze from north-east gradually
grew in strength, and at midnight reached the force of a severe gale,
which increased all night, and in the morning every reef in the storm-
jib had to be tied in. The sea was fearful, but the yacht lay to very
well without shipping any water. It was impossible to see 100 yards
for spindrift, and a big steamer passing very slowly towards the north-
east could only be seen at occasional moments. The gale blew with
great force all day, but at midnight the wind began to ease, and the
Nov. 20, next dav it was possible to shake out all reefs. On November 20, as

] 905. 1 . \

oo'^N °° ^ie W^nc^ fallen to nearly calm, and the locality was only twenty-five

iirw12" m^es from the station intended, it was decided to take the opportunity

offered to work. Heaving to, water samples were taken from

1,400 fathoms upwards.

On November 23 the ship was about fifty miles eastward of the
old Station 61, strong westerly winds having put her off her intended
course, and to general dismay it was found that the ship was making
a considerable amount of water since the terrible oales of the 18th and

Cj

19th, and the two Downton pumps on board were unworkable. That

the ship should have sprung a leak in this manner could only be

accounted for on the supposition that she had received serious damage

underneath from being laid upon the rocks in Orkney in August. I

shipped a scratch crew to take the vessel from Hull to Orkney, and

the certificated genius in charge of her managed to put her on the

sharp rocks of Houton Cove, where she had to lie for a whole tide.

No doubt, as was subsequently proved in dry dock at Gibraltar, she

received serious damage then, though, owing to the absence of a slip

large enough to take her in Orkney, it was not possible at the time to

examine her bottom. The severe gales of the 18th and 19th in the

Nov. 23, Bav of Biscav no doubt strained her and opened a leak. However, it
19°5. " . . . .

Lat. 36° was decided to continue the cruise to Madeira. Consequently, on
Long. 1 3° November 23, in Lat. 36° 56' N., Long. 13° 6' W., water samples were
taken from 1,000 fathoms upwards.

Fortunately, fine weather now set in, but with light south-west
winds, which necessitated very slow progress, it was not until

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

45

November 27 that the next station was reached. This was in fZ' 27
Lat. 33° 31' N., Long. 16° 57' W., where for 1,200 fathoms upwards gj1^3
water samples were taken. Each and every day now baling out with
relays and buckets was regular — about 1,200 gallons of water in the
twenty-four hours.

However, Madeira was now visible, when it was hoped that some
sort of repairs could be effected. On November 28 the ship was 28,
brought to anchor in Funchal Bay. As there were no facilities in FunchaL
Madeira for repairs, the only thing that could be done was to put
in a pulsometer pump, and with this the water was kept under during
the passage from Funchal to Gibraltar. Several days were wasted
here in executing the necessary repairs ; however, on December 14, 14,

work was recommenced at thirty miles’ distance south-west from the
old Station 38. Here water samples were taken from 1,400 fathoms. 10
After proceeding forty-nine miles with a fair wind it dropped to calm,
and the 16th and 17th were perfectly calm. However, on December 18 18>

tbe position was reached of Lat. 35° 53' N., Long. 7° 35' W., and a ff'N35°
sounding gave 654 fathoms with a bottom of grey ooze. The water- 7
bottle was put down to 600 fathoms. Gannets were seen flying about,
reminiscent of more northerly climates.

Next day, after very light variable breezes, mostly dead ahead, the f9e0Cg 19,
station Lat, 35° 50' N., Long. 6° 41' W., was reached, when a sounding g^35
gave 284 fathoms, with a very rocky bottom, the sounding-lead being ^rw.6
deeply scored. Water samples were taken from 280 fathoms upwards.

Cape Spartell was plainly visible during the day. On December 20,
in Lat. 35° 55' N., Long. 5° 53' W., a sounding gave 164 fathoms, and
water samples were taken, after which the course was Gibraltar, which
was reached about 5 p.m. on December 20. Dec. 20,

1 1905.

From this date until February 3, 1906, was occupied at Gibraltar, Gibraltar,
where, after long delay, the yacht was put on to the slip for examina-
tion of the bottom. The surmise as to the cause of the leak was
confirmed, and after stripping a considerable length of copper, injury
was discovered, which could only have been caused by putting the
vessel on the rocks in Orkney. All repairs having been effected, tbe

46

The Log of the Cruise of 1905—1906

Feb. 7,
1906.

Oil Cape
Baba.

Feb. 9,

1906.

Off

Malaga.

Feb. 14,

1906.

Off

Malaga.

Feb. 15,
1906.
Lat. 35°
50' N.,
Long. 4°
20' W.

ship got away on February 3, and immediately experienced extra-
ordinary weather, mostly lying to off Cape Baba, Morocco, close-
reefed, the land of Morocco all covered with snow and a wind blowing
‘great guns.’ A sounding on February 6 gave a depth of 500 fathoms,
but the sounding was not reliable. Next morning, February 7, the
wind eased, and the yacht was some miles nearer the land, when a
sounding gave a depth of 300 fathoms, with a bottom of mud. The
trawl was lowered with two bag-nets attached to the trawl heads
and 600 fathoms of warp, and towed for an hour, when the wind
strengthened, and the trawl had to be hauled up again, coming up
with the beam broken, the net containing only two little fishes (a
Stomicis boa and Scopelus , spf the bag-nets containing a lot of shells,
crustaceans, etc.

On February 9, the Straits having been crossed, the ship was lying
off Malaga with a strong gale from north-west, and on the evening of
the 9th the wind moderated enough to allow of the trawl being put
down in 130 fathoms, and dragged towards the shore to 80 fathoms.
A great quantity of Crustacea, holothuria, shells, sand, and mud, was
the result, but no fish. On the 10th the weather became better, and
being well up under the land in 40 fathoms deep, the trawl was put
over and towed for an hour, when several species of fish were captured
( Gobi us niger , CaUionymus maculatus , Capros aper, Citharus unguatula ,
Arnoglossus latema ), besides a number of Crustacea, including a large
Aristeomorpha .

On Sunday night, February 12, it blew ‘great guns,’ and being-
close to Malaga, the yacht was put in there for shelter.

For the next two days it was very stormy, with snow throughout
the day, but on the 14tli it became better, and getting out of Malaga
the trawl was put down in 300 fathoms, and many fish were captured,
notably Pristiurus melanostomus , Raia oxyrhynchus , Hoplostethus medi-
terraneus , Capros aper , Macrurus coelorynchus , Lop hkis sp ., Squatina
aculeata.

Intending to visit the old Station 44 of the 1905 cruise on
February 15, in Lat. 35° 50' N., Long. 4° 20' W., water samples

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

47

were taken from 7 00 fathoms upwards. Here it was desired to use
Pettersson’s machine, but the water was too deep to anchor the
ship. On February 16, off Marbella, the trawl was put down in
500 fathoms, and in the bag-net on the trawl-head was a Stomias boa ,
and in the trawl some Scopelus and Gonostoma , and some Germodus
parvus.

On February 17, still off' Marbella, but nearer to land, in
276 fathoms, the trawl was put down again, but with very unsuccessful
results, both bag-nets on the trawl-heads gone, having broken away
with the weight of mud contained in them.

Getting away from Gibraltar on February 21 with a strong bio w
from the west, while waiting the opportunity to get off' to the Gettys-
burg Bank, the trawl was put down in Gibraltar Bay, and a few fishes
captured, amongst which were Hop loste thus mediterraneus , Gad us
argenteus , Macrurus coelorynclius. At night it came on to blow so
very strongly that the ship was brought to anchor in Algeciras Bay,
where she lay until Sunday, the 26th, a gale from the west to north-
west lasting all the time. It moderated sufficiently on the Sunday to
get out as far as Tarifa, when, falling quite calm, the tide took
the ship right back to Gibraltar. Next day a light wind was blowing
from the west, which freshened considerably as the day wore on, and
a whole day was spent in getting as far as Trafalgar Bay ; and
from then, until March 2, the whole period was occupied endeavouring
under double reefs to get to the Gettysburg. On this day a sounding
on the west side of the bank gave 164 fathoms, and continuing a
little farther, 230 fathoms, with a bottom of tine white sand and
shells. Then east-north-east, three miles away, bottom was reached
at 80 fathoms, and putting down the trawl and towing over 80 to
40 fathoms, it got fast in a rock and came up with the beam broken
and without a single fish in it, but plenty of dead shells and a few
Crustacea. A water-breaker, with a heavy piece of iron attached,
allowing a flagstaff to stand vertically in the water, on which could be
fixed the anchor light, was then put out and anchored, so that as the
ship dodged about all night it could be seen, and the position kept for

Feb. 16,
1906.

Of!' Mar-
bella.

Feb. 17,
1906.

OH Mar-
bella.

Feb. 21,
1906.
Gibraltar
Bay.

March 2,
1906.
Gettys-
burg
Bank.

48

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

March 5,
1906.
Gettys-
burg
Bank.
The
current
meter.

work in the morning. Most of the next day was spent in repairing
the trawl, but about 6 p.m. it was put out in 60 fathoms on the south
side of the bank ; but the wind dying away completely, the trawl
failed to capture any fish, but a quantity of shells, coral, and sponges
were brought up. Leaving the buoy in position, the yacht dodged
round the light all night, which was found again next morning,
Sunday, March 4, when the trawl was put over again in 100 fathoms
on the east side of the bank. Suddenly passing into deep water, the
trawl would not keep the bottom ; consequently, amongst the mass of
stuff brought up, there was only one small fish in the sprat-net.
Centriscus scolopantime and Ser ramus catrilla were taken with a hand-
line. Later on in the day the trawl was put down in 80 fathoms,
when, getting fast in the bottom, it was impossible to move it, and
finally broke away altogether along with 50 fathoms of wire. Though
having spare beam and net on board, there were no spare trawl-heads,
and nothing remained but to go back to Gibraltar to get new ones
made.

March 5 was at last a suitable day to work the current meter. All
previous efforts to use it were frustrated by the prevailing bad
weather. It requires the calmest of weather for satisfactory results,
and is in any case a very troublesome apparatus to use. On this
particular day the sea was quite smooth, with a light breeze from the
south- — such a condition of things as but rarely occurs at this time of
year, even in these latitudes.

The results of this experiment are as follows :

Position

Depth in
Fathoms.

Direction of
Current.

Number of
Turns a
Minute.

Velocity
increase in
Seconds.

Tempera-

ture.

Gettysburg Bank ... [

2

W.N.W.

30

11-3

15-0°

Lat. 36° 32' N. ...

30

W.S.W.

34

] 0-0

14-4°

Long. 11° 55' W. ... (

50

S.W.

48-2

15-4

14-3°

The surface current over the Gettysburg Bank appears to work
round a circle, running longer south-west and north-east than it does
in any other course.

The Log of the Cruise of 1005 1906 49

Bottom at this spot was at 55 fathoms depth, and rocky. The
Gettysburg Bank is unsuitable for trawling ; everywhere under
100 fathoms rocks occur, in which a trawl is certain sooner or later to
be lost. Outside 100 fathoms the water deepens very fast.

After leaving the Bank, a tine breeze from south-west soon brought 10,
the ship off Cape St. Vincent; then, veering round to east, a gale Gibraltar,
sprang up, lasting that night and all the next day, necessitating three
reefs in the mainsail. Making for the old Station 42 in the mouth of
the Straits, the anchor was dropped in 170 fathoms on March 10, the
day being fine and sea quite smooth ; but the current was altogether
too strong for the current meter, the wire standing away aft, as if the
ship were going before a fair breeze of wind. At 2 fathoms depth,
the time allowed between opening and shutting was six minutes, and
the number of turns 825 per minute, giving a result far beyond any-
thing in Professor Pettersson’s tables. At depths below 2 fathoms
the apparatus could not he made to work at all, and it is evident that
in a current like that passing through the Straits of Gibraltar no good
result can be got out of it as at present devised. It was quite hard
work getting the anchor in again, especially as it had taken a very
strong' hold on the bottom.

Leaving Gibraltar on March 17 with a fair wind, by evening it was
blowing very strong, and three reefs were necessary. On the 19th, ^r5]l 19,
when off Cape St. Vincent (south-east, twenty miles), the trawl was j^1 yTe
put down in 300 fathoms, when the wind dropped almost to calm ; con- cent-
sequently the haul was very poor, containing, however, one perfect
specimen of Chauliodus Sloanii, comparatively rare. Next day,

March 20, the trawl was put out in 280 fathoms, twenty miles south
by east from Cape St. Vincent. The sea was very rough, and, after
towing for an hour, it had to be hauled up in consequence of the strong-
wind and sea. The chief captures were Macrurus ccelorynchus and
M. Levis, and a couple of Nephrops norwegicus. March 21 and 22 21 ’

were very stormy, twenty-two miles south-south-east of Lagos Bay, 011 Lagos‘
but on the 23rd it was possible to put the trawl out again in 400
fathoms, when, after trawling for an hour, the wind freshened so con-

7

50

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

siclerahly that the trawl had to be hauled up as quickly as possible ; and
with three reefs in the mainsail, double-reefed foresail, and storm-jib,
the ship was put towards land to seek shelter for the night. The fish
captured were Phycis blennioides and Zeugopterus Boscii , along with
two Hat fish of the megrim kind.

i906h23’ March 23, west-south-west of Cape St. Mary, a sounding gave

w.s.w. of 71 fathoms where the chart marks 320, evidently a new bank, the

Mary. extent of which, however, must be small, as, after sailing a few miles
to the eastward, the depth was 360 fathoms. The new bank was
situated with Cape St. Mary bearing by compass N. 72 E., distance
twenty-one miles. The trawling result in 400 fathoms included
Pagellus centrodontus , Scorpcena dactmoptera , and Macrurus ccelo-
rynchus, among many other things — Crustacea, sponges, and anemones —
one of which was growing on a lump of coal, of which several pieces
came up in the trawl, probably dropped at some time from a passing
steamer.

On March 26, when south-east half south from Cape St. Mary,
Portugal, the trawl was shot in 350 fathoms, when several fish were
captured, including Scorpcena dactyloptera , Macrurus Icevis , Gadus
argenteus , and Lophius budegassa , along with a miscellaneous collec-
tion of Crustacea, anemones, and cup-coral. The day, though
satisfactory for trawling, was very unpleasant — squally, with much
rain, hail, and sleet.

On March 28, when twenty-six miles south-east by south from Cape
St. Mary, the trawl was shot in 308 fathoms, and when hauled on
board contained a great shark, Echinorhinus spinosus , 7 feet 2 inches
long, the skin covered with sharp spines curved at the point, the whole
weighing about 300 pounds. Too big to preserve, it was with difficulty
heaved back into the sea, having first been ripped open to ascertain
if there was anything in the stomach. This, however, contained only
some well -digested food. In the same haul were several Chimcera
monstrosa , Spinas niger , Scorpcena dactyloptera , Zeugopterus Boscii ,
Macrurus Icevis , Aphoristia sp ., Gadus argenteus , Lophius budegassa ,
a fine hake, and several crustaceans, cup-coral, etc. On March 29,

The Log of the Cruise of 1905—1906

51

trawling all day in 90 to 200 fathoms produced very poor results,
beyond capture of long-spined urchins, big holothuria, and three skate
and one small megrim ; and on the 30th, coming out into deeper water
(Cape St. Mary bearing north-west by north eighteen miles), and
trawling in 310 fathoms, again there wTas little but echinoderms. On
such a bottom it is rare to get fish, but amongst other things, such as
Homola barbata , Pagurus striatus , and coral, was one small sole ( Solea
profundicola) and a very small skate.

From March 30 to April 4 was a continuous gale from south-east fP'i1 4-
when the ship was lying to, with storm trysail and storm-jib ; but on
April 4, the weather moderating, a sounding was made in 417 fathoms,
forty-six miles west from Cape Spartel. A good number of fishes
were captured, including Mora mediterranean Seorpcena dactyloptera ,
Hoplostetkus mediterraneus , Conger vulgaris , Pomatomus telescopinus
and three species of Macrurus , along with a large and tine Polycheles
typhlops , echinoderms, and sponges.

On April 5, thirty-one miles west- south-west of Cape Spartel, the
trawl was shot in 187 fathoms, and a number of fish, including
Torpedo nobiliana , Seorpcena scrofa , Dentex macropthalmus , Rhombus
Boscii , Merlucius vulgaris , Gadus argenteus , Pristiurus melanostomus,
Seorpcena dactyloptera , Macrurus Icevis , and a number of large and
small Crustacea, were taken.

This was the last trawl of the cruise, the ship returning to
Gibraltar, where, after provisioning and a few necessary renewals, she
set sail to England, having completed a fairly successful cruise, con-
sidering the obstacles in the way, such as almost continuous bad
weather, and as regards the trawling outfit, rather unsuitable ap-
paratus. A much heavier trawl-beam, with the trawl-heads made of
broad fiat iron, would prevent the trawl sinking so heavily in the mud,
would allow the trawl to move faster and capture more fish. The
depth of the present trawl-heads is only about 20 inches, and when it
sinks in mud it does not allow sufficient room, and probably a depth of
3 feet would not be too much. All the bottom of the net ought to be
double-meshed to prevent the inevitable tearing which results over

7—2

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

52

some of this ground, which is covered with great branched coral which
would tear anything to pieces.

I am sorry that more use could not be made of Professor
Pettersson’s current meter. Probably in the still water of a Norwegian
fjord it works with satisfaction, but in the locality where the Silver
Belle worked during this cruise it was quite impossible to do much
with the instrument ; and, indeed, as the brief notes recorded show,
the weather was far too stormy for the use of such a delicate
instrument.

Trawling in a sailing-vessel in deep water is a difficult undertaking.
Whereas with steam a ship can move in calm weather, a sailing-vessel
is obliged to work in sufficient wind, and with a light trawl, directly
there is any way on the trawl rises from the bottom and is liable to
turn upside down. In shallow water, with a great length of wire out,
it appears to keep the bottom well enough. But under the most
favourable conditions for work — namely, calm weather — a sailer will,
of course, scarcely move the trawl ; and, again, when it becomes fast,
as it will sometimes do in rocky bottoms, the sailer is at a considerable
disadvantage, and is liable to lose trawl and everything, for the ship
cannot readily be backed as could be done under steam.

Then, again, from Lisbon to the coast of Morocco the bottom is
really very unsuitable for trawling. Even where the sounding-lead
indicates mud there are great masses of coral and rock sticking up at
short intervals, and even in a steam trawler a hand has to be kept on
the engine telegraph all the time the trawl is down, ready to back
astern at the first indication of being caught in the bottom.

Amongst the fishes brought home from this cruise perhaps the
most remarkable was the specimen of Himantolophus llheinhardti ,
which, strangely enough, was not taken in the trawl at all. Coming
ashore at Gibraltar one morning, Buchan Henry found a great commo-
tion amongst the local fishermen over a strange fish which one of
them had captured among the rocks on the east side of Gibraltar.
Such a fish had never been seen there before ; and, indeed, of the
only two examples ever recorded, both had been captured off the coast

The Log of the Cruise of 1905 — 1906

53

of Greenland and Iceland. It was still alive when bought by Henry
for ten shillings, about 16 inches long, and jet black, all except the tips
of the tentacular appendage, which were pure white, and about as
repulsive-looking an object as could well be imagined. That this fish
should be taken in Gibraltar Bay, and at a depth of only about
20 fathoms, is extraordinary, as other congeneric angler fish are sup-
posed to be deep-sea habitants. The specimen is such a prize that it is
now in the Natural History Museum of South Kensington.

NOTE OF THE 1907 CRUISE.

The intention was to go from Scalloway to the south end of the
Faeroe hanks, thence southward to the Butt of Lewis, and from there
out into the deeper water along the shelf of the Atlantic slope, and
continue as far southwards as time and opportunity would permit,
chiefly trawling and dredging. But the weather was anything but
good for this kind of work, and we got no farther south than
St. Ivilda. A fair number of Ashes and a large number of Crustacea,
and, amongst other things, a very complete collection of Pycnogonkhe
were obtained ; but as these collections have not yet been reported
on, I defer the discussion of the results. I had the advantage of the
assistance of Mr. Opie, of Cambridge, who remained on board
throughout the greater part of the cruise, and who ably and
energetically gave his attention to the preservation of the specimens
collected.

The latter part of the cruise was continued by a passage from
Shetland to Norway, which I made in response to a request from
Dr. O. Pettersson, who asked me to work hydrographic-ally across a
line which he marked out, and which would connect up the observa-
tions of the Scottish, German, and Scandinavian expeditions. Dr. O.
Pettersson kindly undertook to have the water samples and plankton
examined in the Swedish Laboratory, and these observations are
published here. The full discussion of them is not possible until
the German and Scotch observations are ready for publication. As
Dr. Pettersson remarks, there was an unusual flow of Atlantic water
during September, 1907, into the eastern part of the North Sea,
characterized by southerly plankton forms. Professor d’Arcy
Thompson has very kindly made some remarks, and provided me

51

Note of the 1907 Cruise

55

with information of the observations made by the Goldseeker at the
two stations Sec. 6a and Sec. 8, and these are embodied here. The
Stations 7 and 8 of the Goldseeker correspond closely with onr
Stations 2 and 3, and, while the Scottish observations were made in
August, 1907, onrs were made about three weeks later.

Leaving Scalloway on Tuesday, September 17, rough weather
towards night necessitated shelter in Lerwick Harbour, and for two
days there was a very strong blow from south-west to west. The ship
did not get away until the 20th, and the first station marked by
Professor Pettersson was reached on Saturday, the 21st. This was
Lat. 60° 58' N., Long. 0° 47' E., and the depth 80 fathoms, with a
continually rising wind and heavy swell from the north ; by the time
the observations were finished it was really too rough to work any
longer. At 2 p.m. the same day the next station (2), in Lat. 60° o' 1ST.,
Long. 2° O' E., was reached, the wind still blowing strong from the
north and the barometer very high. The temperature at 50 fathoms
was so extraordinary that it was thought that the observation must be
wrong, but two more observations at this depth proved it to be correct.
The wind was very high and the swell strong, and as night was fast
approaching and further work became impossible, it was decided to run
past the next two stations (3 and 4), and make straight for the Nor-
wegian shore, a distance of sixty-seven miles, so as not to lose the fine
fair wind, and on the return passage to work the stations omitted.
Consequently Station 5 was reached on September 22, the land being
fifteen miles away east, three-quarters south, and covered with snow.
The sounding gave 193 fathoms. Starting work at 5 a.m., it took five
hours to take all the observations and to complete by the use of the
closing-net at 190, 60, and 20 fathoms. During this time the barometer
commenced to fall rapidly, and the wind backed to west-north- west, a
head- wind for the return passage. Station 4, Lat. 61° 32' N. and
Long. 3° 44' E., was reached in the afternoon, the wind strong and
west by north, and the weather looking very bad. Rain began to fall,
and the rough sea compelled the taking in of two reefs in the mainsail,
and bonneting off the foresail and storm-jib. The barometer having

56

Note of the 1907 Cruise

dropped an inch since morning, it gave promise of a very dirty night.
At this station the extraordinary temperature at 60 fathoms suggested
something wrong with the observation, hut the thermometer was in
perfect order. The next station (3) was about thirty miles to wind-
ward. The night of September 22 was very stormy, with a wind
backing from west to south-west, and the rain falling in torrents. At
4 a.m. it veered to north, then north-east, and finally dropped very
light, and at 1.30 p.m. the ship was a few miles north-east of the
position intended ; hut, considering the weather and the early approach
of darkness, it was decided to work at this spot. The sounding marked
260 fathoms, and when work was finished at 6 p.m. it was getting dark,
and the rain was descending in torrents. With a light wind a course
was set for Flugga (Shetland), 124 miles distant west half south.
While working this station a very large dead whale drifted past the
ship. It was quite fresh, and probably had broken away from a whaler
during the night. The very light wind and heavy swell made progress
slow, and it was not until 11 p.m. on September 25 that Flugga light
was made out through a dense fog about one mile south-east during a
momentary lift.

Complete discussion of these results is not at the moment possible,
but I may publish along with them the following letter from Professor
d’Arcy Thompson, who has been kind enough to provide me with
information as to the observations made bv the Goldseeker :

‘ Dundee, May 4, 1908.

‘ My dear Wolfenden,

‘ The observations you have sent to me seem to be of very
great interest, but it is impossible for me to go into them in detail at
the moment — not only for want of time, but also because our own
observations for last summer are not yet fully worked up. . . .

‘Your section from Shetland to Norway is a very beautiful one,
and shows, in the first place, that we miss much by not running our
own line farther towards the Norwegian coast. The other section
(Section II.) is taken from the Goldseeker observations for 1906.

4 We did our two Stations 7 and 8, which correspond closely with

Note of the 1907 Cruise

57

your 2 and 3, at the very end of August, 1907, while you did them
rather more than three weeks later. We found a large superficial
body of fresh water at both stations, and especially at Station 8 ;
while this had entirely disappeared from Station 7, and very nearly so
from Station 8, three weeks later.

‘ At these stations the alternate pulse of comparatively fresh and
of oceanic water is a well-marked feature, and, on the whole, the flood
of fresh water occurs in summer, and is replaced by the salter water
in winter. But the dates vary very much, and one of the diagrams
which I send you shows the conditions at or about the month of
September in 1905, 1906, and 1907, all at Station 8. You will see that
the fresh water was lacking in 1905, hut abundant, according to our
observations, in 1907, and still more so in 1906. Your observations in
1907 correspond very closely with ours in 1905.

‘ . . . . What we have in that region is a very rapid change of
conditions from place to place within a short distance, and you have
got into a body of water more similar to that which we found at
Station 9 to the westward than what we found nearer to your position,
three weeks earlier. I send you a note of our results at Station 9,
and a diagram of the salinities and temperatures found by us at
Stations 8 and 9 and by you in the neighbourhood of the former
station. You will see that your results are, on the whole, intermediate.
Accordingly, if the Silver Belle was a little farther to the west, or
the Goldseeker a little farther to the east of the given positions, or if,
on the other hand, the body of water, especially the surface water, had
moved a very few miles eastward during the three weeks, in either
case the apparent discrepancies would be very nearly explained, and
the results would not be so very far from correspondence.

‘ It would seem, therefore, that while we, no doubt, want more
frequent observations in this region, so we also want more closely
contiguous stations.

‘ Yours very faithfully,

‘ D’Arcy Thompson.’

8

OBSERVATIONS CONDUCTED ON SAILING-SHIPS.

As the making of scientific observations on board a sailing-ship
requires some appliances and methods which differ from those on
board a steam-vessel, I think it may not be out of place to briefly
describe the most suitable ways and means of conducting these
observations. A steam-vessel must have many advantages over a
sailing-ship ; but to be put against these is cost, both initial and of
upkeep, and for work a long way from land and in deep water, such
as the Atlantic, a steam- vessel of comparatively large size and stout
build is essential, if any degree of comfort and safety is to be looked
for. There is no doubt that a stoutly-built sailing-ship of anything
over 100 tons (y.m.) is a much more comfortable and safe vessel to
ride out a severe gale than a steam-vessel of much greater tonnage
and size. The great disadvantages of a sailing-ship are the loss of
time taken in completing a lengthy cruise, and the days that are wasted
in beating around a ‘ station ’ and lying to very often, while waiting
for a favourable opportunity to commence and complete the work
involved in the use of towing-nets, etc., in deep water. Eor the rest,
the same difficulties l|pset the observer in either steam or sailing
vessel, such as devices to counteract the heavy strain thrown upon
several hundred fathoms of wire with the weight of a heavy towing-
net at the lower end, etc., when the ship is rising and falling or labour-
ing more or less heavily in a strong swell. Where the steam-ship has
the greatest advantage over the sailing-ship is in the ability to go
ahead or astern at will, and to keep over or up to the towing-net or
trawl lowered into deep water, and when dredge or trawl gets caught
in rock at the bottom, which is not of infrequent occurrence, and
occurs often when least expected, in the ability to back quickly

5cS

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

59

and release the imprisoned apparatus. A sailing-ship is, in fact,
absolutely at the mercy of wind and wave, while a steam-ship has at
least some control over adverse elements.

Having said so much, however, it is necessary to state that a
sailing-vessel of the size of a Grimsby or Brixham trawler can really
do all the work at sea comprised in the ordinary hydrographical and
scientific work of fishery investigation that a much more expensive
and elaborate steamship can do, and at very much less cost. It is
nearly entirely a matter of good seamanship and handling the vessel
in an intelligent manner. My own experience, extending over some
years now, teaches me that the average cost of a three months’ cruise
in a ship of about 130 tons (y.m.) does not amount to more than
£300, whereas in a steam-ship this figure must be doubled. Conse-
quently, for investigations such as those which have for a long time
been undertaken by the International Council and by the various
Fishery Boards, I have always been at a loss to understand why use
was not made of sailing-ships, which in comparatively shallow waters
such as the North Sea and English Channel, and for a distance of
70 to 100 miles round our British and European coasts, could do
most, if not all, of the work of fishery and hydrographic observations
quite as effectively, if not always so rapidly, as steam-vessels, and at
very much less cost. There seems to be a mistaken impression that
steam is essential, which I do not believe to lie at all correct. Indeed,
if this were so, the lengthy hydrographic and other observations
recorded in this book would have no value ; apd I hope I do not over-
state the case when I say these observations prove not only what a
sailing-ship can do, but that they may have considerable scientific
value. I hope that they may encourage many others to follow on the
same lines, and contribute, according to their ability, to the scientific
study of the sea.

I have frequently, during the last few years, heard of yachtsmen
who have expressed desires to do some work of this kind, but did not
know how to set about it. There is really nothing mysterious about
the handling of deep-sea apparatus ; the only thing necessary is to

8—2

GO

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

conform to the requirements of scientific accuracy, without which
hydrographical observations would, of course, be absolutely useless.
Dredging and trawling may be carried on by anyone, and information
of the most important character obtained as regards fishes and the
distribution of species of marine fauna (and flora). The tedium of
many a weary hour at sea might be relieved by the excitement of
putting out a tow-net or dredge, the contents of which may very
often reveal some prize. Of course, to the ordinary individual, not a
zoologist, the chief difficulty is that he does not know what he has
got ; but a very short practical experience is all that is necessary to
enable him to recognize what is common, and therefore usually of
little value to the scientist, and what is a rare or uncommon, and
therefore worth preserving. Scientists are always willing enough to
assist in the investigation of the marine fauna, and many a museum
might be thus greatly enriched with rare or uncommon specimens.

I cannot but think that to those fond of cruising away from land
a new and profitable delight might be added by undertaking observa-
tions of this kind.

Still, desultory observations of this nature, however gratifying to
the amateur, are of no value to the scientist unless they are carried
out on a definite and continuous plan. For instance, when a yachts-
man is contemplating a cruise, say to the Mediterranean, to the
Azores, or across the Atlantic, or northerly to Iceland or the Faeroes,
etc., observations on hydrography, or tow-nets used at regular intervals
during the cruise, cannot fail to record facts of interest and of great
assistance to marine scientists, especially if the observations are
conducted upon a plan and under the advice of someone who can
acquaint the intending observer with the essentials for successful
and useful work.

Returning after this digression to the subject-matter of this
chapter — namely, the apparatus and methods suitable for a sailing-
ship — we may first briefly discuss the matter of what such a vessel
may do and the means of accomplishing it.

A sailing-ship may quite well undertake soundings, the use of

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

61

deep-sea tow-nets, the taking of temperatures, the collection of water
samples (for subsequent analysis), dredging, and trawling.

In comparatively shallow waters, such as the North Seas, extended
voyages may he made and effective scientific results recorded with
quite small craft. My small yacht, the Walwin , of only 80 tons
(y.m.), has made frequent cruises from Shetland to the Faeroe Islands,
some of the results of which are recorded in this volume. But as
there is no room on such a vessel for steam apparatus, everything
has to he hauled by hand. Where the depth is not over 100 to
200 fathoms, this is not difficult in willing hands ; but when the depth
reaches 500 fathoms and over, it is too great a tax upon human
endurance, even as exemplified in the Shetland sailorman. Conse-
quently, a larger vessel is desirable, in which is placed a steam
capstan.

The Silver Belle is a ship of 120 to 130 tons (y.m.), sufficiently
large and comfortable to make extended cruises in any direction.
Into this ship 1 fitted a steam capstan of the type commonly employed
on the fishing-boats of the North of Scotland. The boiler is placed
below deck, rather forward of the middle, between the forecastle and
the chart-room, and steam is led from it to the capstan, which is
placed on deck on the port side, at a distance behind the mainmast
sufficient to permit of the big drum (on which is wound the wire)
being placed forward of it and clear of the boom.

There is nothing about the drums which carry the wire which
any ordinary engineer cannot devise suitably to the vessel for which
they are intended. The ordinary reels used on board ship to carry
short lengths of wire cable are, however, scarcely suitable for deep-
water work, because the strain upon them is too great, and they sooner
or later give way. The user is then lucky if he escapes without the
loss of several hundred fathoms of wire and the apparatus. Some-
thing stronger than these ordinary reels is therefore required. On
board the Silver Belle I have a special winch, made for me by Messrs.
Bullivant and Co., consisting of two stout upright iron plates, bolted
together by cross-pieces, and enclosing a large drum divided into two

62

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

sections — the one to carry several hundred to 2,000 fathoms of wire
(according to size), the other section to carry the tine wire used for
sounding. This winch also carries a clutch and brake, by which the
speed of revolution may he controlled, and externally on the axis of
the revolving drums is affixed a cogged wheel, which, with a similar
one upon the steam capstan, carries a chain band (with movable links,
so that it can be shortened or lengthened). In practice the wire is
reeled off rapidly by its own weight, controlled by the foot-brake,
which allows of immediate arrest of the process. In hauling in, the
capstan through the chain band actuates the drums, revolving them
and coiling up the wire as it comes on board. The ascent can be con-
trolled as easily as the descent.

In order to check effectively the amount of wire paid out and to
ascertain the depth to which the apparatus is lowered, the wire, after
leaving the drum, is led through a pulley, the revolutions of which
are registered on a counter, each revolution marking 1 fathom of wire
paid out. From this counter the wire is led forward to a pulley, the
method of which differs according as the work to be accomplished is
trawling or tow-netting.

In tow-netting the wire used is necessarily of smaller diameter
than in trawling ; consequently, at considerable depths there is much
more strain upon it ; and if the ship is in a heavy swell, as is frequent
in the open ocean even upon the finest days, she rides up and down
considerably, and sudden jerks are thrown upon the wire, which may
break the strands, or even snap it completely. On one occasion we
were unlucky enough in this way to lose several hundred fathoms of
wire and a closing tow-net attached, along with a couple of deep-sea
thermometers.

To avoid accidents of this kind an ‘accumulator’ is necessary.
Such an apparatus is constructed as follows : Two wooden discs are
prepared — one with a hook which can be attached to the mast ; the
other with a hook also, which can be attached to the spar, as seen in
the diagram. Between the two discs are extended six or more
lengths of stout, solid rubber bands (obtainable from any of the

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

63

wholesale rubber manufacturers). The size of the discs and length of
the rubber are matters as to which it is impossible to lay down any
general rule.

O

The wire used for tow-netting is usually a stranded wire, and one
which we have used successfully was supplied to me by Bullivant
and Co. — a strand of seven wires (21 gauge), ^ inch diameter, with a
breaking strain of 10 cwt. Five hundred fathoms of this wire weigh
about 60 pounds. Wires of this description vary very considerably,

A, Steam capstan ; B, large reel divided so as to carry thick wire and sounding wire ; C, counter
marking in fathoms paid out; D, block attached to movable spar F ; E, wheel over which
wire runs ; H, accumulator attached to mainmast at G; ii, coil of rope attached to spar.

and some that we have obtained elsewhere have proved quite worthless,
the strands overriding, and thus preventing the descent of messengers.
A ‘ soft ’ wire should never be selected, for this reason.

A sudden strain is by the accumulator greatly relieved, and though
sometimes extended to a dangerous degree, we have never lost a
tow-net or instrument since using it, now for some years.

The general plan is exhibited in the diagram.

From the steam capstan A the chain passes over the cogged wheel of
the winch B. The wire from this drum is led to the counter C , thence
over the pulley D , and from that over the pulley .A, and carries either
the sounding-lead or the tow-net. To the bottom of the mainmast is

64

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

fixed the spar Zq and at a convenient height upon the mainmast is
fixed a hook, G , on to which can he hooked the accumulator, H1 which
again is affixed to the spar F by a hook, I. The spar can thus move
freely in all directions and give full play to the accumulator ; and in
order that it cannot by any accident to the latter break away, a length
of manilla rope, A", is attached to the accumulator and coiled round the
bottom of the mainmast, and at the other end to the spar at I.

This arrangement is suitable for work in deep water — i.e ., over
500 fathoms ; hut the spar can he dispensed with, along with the
accumulator, in shallower water, the wire being led from the counter
over a pulley-wheel affixed to the deck, and thence carried over a
pulley attached to the end of a davit.

With such means we have found no difficulty in using the tow-net
at depths of over 1,000 fathoms, and sounding to 2,000 fathoms. The
depth to which a heavy tow-net may be lowered and raised again must
he regulated by the capacity of the winch to haul it on board. The
haulage must necessarily he slow, for if performed too quickly the
condition of the animals in the bag of the net will he woeful, if they
are not all mashed into pulp.

As an example of the time occupied in such operations in deep
water, I may quote the following data from the log-book of the Silver
Belle :

June 26, 1904, in Lat. 48° 12' N., Long. 16° 26' W.- — a fine day, with
long, heavy swell from the west, with a west wind.

The ship on the port tack, and the net first put down to 1,500
fathoms, and hauled up again. The result being unsatisfactory, the
net was lowered a second time. This occupied altogether one hour,
the net being towed for fifteen minutes ; then put down successively
to 1,200, 900, 700, 500, 400, and 200 fathoms. On each occasion this
meant, after the net had been received on board, that its contents had
to be carefully removed and washed out, and the net itself carefully
cleaned with fresh water before lowering again. Some considerable
time was thus expended in manipulations on deck, and the whole time
occupied from start to finish was twelve hours.

Observations Con ducted on Sailing-Ships

65

On a second occasion — in Lat. 4<S° 27', Long. 15° 38' W. — the
work of collecting samples of water, and tilling from the water-hottle
tubes of water for subsequent gas analysis, from depths 1,570, 1,400,
1,000, 700, 500, 300, and 100 fathoms respectively, occupied eight and
a half hours.

On another occasion the time occupied in using the closing-net at
1,400 1,600, 1,000, 700, 500, 300, 100, 50, and 25 fathoms occupied
twelve hours.

These, of course, are operations with the closing-net, which has to
he lowered tightly closed, opened under water by the messenger sent
down the line, and closed again under water by another messenger
before hauling up ; and these successive operations occupy much more
time than would be required for the mere manipulation of nets which
it was not so particularly desired to open and close at specified
depths.

There may be a difference of opinion as to the advantages of
horizontally towing-nets, such as the author’s large closing-net, or
Garstang’s smaller apparatus, or of vertically actuated closing-nets,
such as Fowler’s ; but I believe the results are practically the same
with horizontally towed nets.

The drift of the ship of not more than a mile an hour is quite
sufficient, and though the tow-net does not remain long at the depth to
which it is primarily lowered, because by the drift of the vessel it is
constantly rising, it does not rise greatly in the space of fifteen
minutes and, moreover, practice proves that if there is much angle on
the wire, the messengers for opening and closing cannot descend, and
therefore the result is negative. In vertically acting nets the apparatus
is raised through so many fathoms, and the result is the collection of the
fauna between, for example, 500 and 400, or 400 and 300 fathoms, and
so on. The actual quantity captured by either vertically or horizontally
actuated nets is probably very little different. Unfortunately, as we
cannot see what is going on at any considerable depth, we can only
say that the capture has been made approximately at the depth stated.

While the use of closing-nets gives very interesting and sometimes

66

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

important results as to tlie character of certain fauna at certain depths,
and the life-history of certain species, it is rendered much more
valuable by the use at the same time of the water-bottle, whereby
samples of water can be taken from the same depth and the salinity
be subsequently determined, and by the simultaneous use of the
thermometer attached to the tow-net. The temperature of the water
at successive depths in the open ocean ( e.g ., the Atlantic) exhibits
such a fairly regular graduated scale, that the temperature taken by a
thermometer attached to a tow-net at the time of opening and closing
is a pretty accurate guide to the actual depth at which the net has
really been. It has been our habit to attach to the tow-net when
lowered two thermometers — generally a Negretti and Zambra revers-
ing thermometer and a maximum or minimum thermometer.

Sometimes it is desirable to collect samples of sea- water from
various depth! for analysis of the contained gases. Such examinations
are of great scientific interest taken in conjunction with the salinity
observations, and were of especial interest in our 1904 cruise in
elucidating the extent of water of Mediterranean origin then occupy-
ing patches in the Bay of Biscay.

For the method of preservation of these samples very little extra
apparatus is requisite. When the water-bottle is raised on board,
a sample of its contents is introduced into a glass bulb, which has been
partially exhausted, so as to obtain a partial vacuum ; the long, thin
capillary neck being introduced into the nozzle of the water-bottle is
then fractured bv a special pair of ‘ scissors.’ The sea- water fills the
bulb, which, with its long neck, is then removed, and sealed by bending
the end in the flame of a spirit-lamp. Put away in special boxes made
so that the bulb and its two prolonged necks can lie in slots specially
made to receive them, the flasks may safely be packed and carried on
board, awaiting transmission to the laboratory for analysis.

As to the apparatus required in trawling in a sailing-vessel,
experience must he the best teacher. This experience may be more
quickly and profitably obtained by having on board, in charge of this
apparatus, a professional trawler. The adventures of a trawl in inex-

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

67

perienced hands are too numerous and exciting to be pleasant, and the
commonest is that, after painstaking manipulations occupying a long
period of time, the trawl is found to have been upside down and the
net empty.

Perhaps the simplest form of trawl and the one least likely to go
wrong is the ‘ Agassiz ’ trawl. Its iron frame may bend, but is not

Fig. 5.

1. Trawl with muslin net, A, and sprat net, B, attached.

2. Method of placing the nets on the trawl.

3. Dimensions of the sprat net : A, top ; B, bottom ; C, sides.

easy to break, whereas wooden ‘ beam ’ trawls on unsuitable ground
and deep water possess this unfortunate propensity. The ‘ Agassiz ’
trawl has the further advantage that it does not matter which side up
it fishes. It, is a splendid instrument for the capture of interesting
Crustacea, though it takes a goodly number of fishes too.1 Trawlers

1 In one haul with this net we obtained seventeen fish of five different species,
besides a great quantity of Crustacea, starfish, Mollusca, etc.

9—2

68

Observations Con ducted on Sailing-Ships

use the ‘ beam ’ or ‘ otter ’ trawl for this purpose. A 25-foot beam
trawl is a very useful appliance. As suggested to me by Mr. Holt, of
the Irish Fishery Board, we have used this trawl, with two additional
nets affixed to the trawl-net.

A being a muslin net ; B a net made of sprat mesh, one of
convenient size having dimensions as shown in the accompanying
diagram.

It is laced to the trawl, to fit the meshes of the latter when open.
In order to insure that small fishes do not escape the trawl, the cod-end
is lined with the same netting for the last third of its length.

The position of the net on the trawl is as shown in the diagram.

A beam trawl has the great disadvantage of frequent breakages,
and many is the occasion on board the Silver Belle , when the beam has
come up broken from dragging over rocky ground. In every expedi-
tion into deep water a spare trawl should be taken.

I believe that the otter trawl is the most useful apparatus for
general use, and the Danes have a form of eel-mesh otter-trawl
( Aaledrevvaad), which appears to be the latest thing devised in otter
trawls, the size of the boards for which is 48 inches long, 29 inches
wide, and having a weight of 110 pounds each. Glass floats are used
instead of corks.

Another device of theirs is the ‘ Yngel ’ trawl, a big pelagic canvas
otter-net, with boards 36 inches by 20 inches and a weight each of
40 pounds. Though we ordered these in plenty of time for the 1907
cruise, they were not delivered until the cruise was finished ; therefore
I am unable to state anything as to their practicability.

Besides trawls and tow-nets, dredges of the Plymouth Laboratory
pattern, 3 feet 6 inches wide, should be included in the outfit.

If the object of the cruise be trawling and dredging and the collec-
tion of the larger animals (such as fish, etc.), the equipment should
include a supply of 4 to 6 gallon wide-mouthed jars, with iron screw
clamps and rubber rings ; also air-tight preserving jars ; and for smaller
animals bottles and vials with good tapering corks ; copper labels,
such as gardeners use, which can be written upon with a pencil and

Observations Conducted, on Sailing-Ships

69

tied on to the fish by copper wire ; butter muslin to wrap tisb, etc., in
when to be stored in a tank or jar ; a supply of cotton-barked netting
of 1-inch mesh, which is used to make bags for the top of the trawl
and to line the cod-end of the same ; and a supply of mosquito netting
to make bags to be attached to the trawl. These, however, are often
filled with such a weight of mud as to be carried away completely.

A tin-lined tank, made like a large box, with lid which can be
closed and fastened down, may be usefully affixed to some corner of
the deck, and in this may be stored fish, etc.

The preservatives in use are methylated spirit and formalin, of
which a plentiful supply should be carried.

Of open tow-nets nothing much need be said. There is no
particular virtue in any kind of net, but a number of such nets may
be clamped at intervals upon the warp, and they are, perhaps, all the
better if they are supplied with tin or aluminium vessels at the bottom,
with a tap. On removing the nets from the water the contents of the
silk net gravitate towards the tin cup, and the inside of the net can be
washed into the cup, and the collection made into bottles through
the tap.

Larger nets, bent on to a framework of wood or ordinary gas-
piping, may be employed to trail behind the ship at the surface or
some distance below, and catcli an amazing quantity of plankton ;
and a very useful form of net with a triangular frame of heavy wood
may be usefully employed to drag along the bottom, and many bottom
species which seldom or never leave the mud are collected in this
manner.

Of course open tow-nets give no accurate information as to the
precise locality or depth in which species are captured, and if the
latter be the object of inquiry some form of ‘ closing ’-net must be
employed.

Very nearly the same disposition of apparatus on deck as was
mentioned for deep-water tow-netting is applicable to trawling. Stout
wire warp is preferable to rope (the wire for closing-nets will not
do), and this is reeled off a drum and taken round the steam capstan,

70

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

from which it is led forwards to a pulley, and thence to a lead affixed
to the bulwark. In this case the ‘ counter’ and the spar or davit are
dispensed with.

The warp after leaving the lead may he brought up aft and secured
by a stopper, as is generally done in sailing-trawlers ; and it is a good
thing to leave the winch free, so that if the trawl catches in a rock the
stopper will break and the warp can run free, instead of being brought
up short, witli the loss of apparatus in consequence. It is scarcely
necessary to sav that the gear is always shot to windward.

The manipulation of a ship for trawling and tow-netting is not a
thing which can be taught by anything but experience, and experience
only can teach whether the trawl is sliding nicely over the bottom, the
right speed to go, how much sail to carry, and all the details which
make up good seamanship and mean all the difference between success
and failure.

The collecting of water samples we find we can manage even in
bad weather and a heavy sea. Trawling also can be done in weather
when tow-netting is impossible ; but the latter, especially if closing-nets
be used, and the object is to determine the plankton fauna in different
strata, really requires the calmest weather, or light breezes. In bad
weather and a heavy swell the ship rides up and down so greatly as to
throw very heavy strain upon the wire, and it means risking the total
loss of the net, and frequently the silk net comes up torn and all its
contents gone.

We prefer to tow-net under a light breeze, lowering the peak of the
mainsail and swinging out the boom with a ‘ tackle ’ attached, and
keeping the jib and mizzen standing. By keeping the ship well up to
the wind we can regulate the speed of drift very nicely, and this must
be very little in tow-netting. In trawling or dredging, a little more
sail is required, and the course may be a little off the wind, so as to
keep sufficient way on to move the trawl. The ship can, by careful
handling, be kept fairly stationary for tow-netting, and a false anchor
may even be employed. A very good substitute for this is to put out
aft the big mid-water net, which may be allowed to drift with a good

Observations Conducted on Sailing-Ships

71

length of warp. It soon fills and forms quite an efficient false
anchor.

I purposely here do not go into great detail about the apparatus
necessary on shipboard, or the methods of preserving different animals,
as all this will be fully dealt with in the forthcoming handbook of the
‘ Challenger ’ Society. The foregoing remarks are little more than hints
of the methods adopted on a sailing-ship, in which the various manipu-
lations cannot be controlled so easily as when steam is available, and
refer, of course, more particularly to our own methods, which we have
had to learn for ourselves.

HYDROGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS.

I.— THE FAEROE-SHETLAND CHANNEL.

II.— FROM IRELAND TO THE AZORES, MADEIRA, AND GIBRALTAR.

III. — FROM USHANT TO GIBRALTAR.

IV. — THE NORTH OF SHETLAND TO NORWAY.

10

I.— THE HYDROGRAPHY OF THE FAEROE-SHETLAND

CHANNEL.

By H. N. Dickson, M.A., D Sc.

{Reprinted from the ‘ Geographical Journal' for April, 1903.)

During the summer months of 1900, 1901, and 1902, the cutter-yacht
Walwin, belonging to Dr. R. Norris Wolfenden, was engaged in
scientific research, under the owner’s direction, in the channel between
the Shetland and Faeroe Islands. The physical investigations consisted
in (1) observations of temperature, for which Negretti and Zambra’s
reversing thermometers, Ivnudsen’s modified form of the same, and
the ordinary Miller-Casella instrument, were employed, sometimes
separately, usually together for purposes of control ; and (2) the
collection of samples of water by means of Mill’s slip water-bottle.
Dr. Wolfenden has been good enough to entrust the working out of
the observations to me, and I may be permitted at the outset to express
the opinion that the way in which they have been made, in a region
where work of the kind is always difficult and arduous, and under
conditions in many ways unfavourable, reflects the greatest credit on
Captain Buchan Henry and his crew. The labours of the Walwin
have provided a unique series of pictures of the conditions occurring
in the Channel, representing successive stages in the march of exceed-
ingly complex phenomena with sufficient accuracy, and none of the
modern expensive apparatus has been employed in the work, which
was carried on from a small cutter of only 36 tons.1

1 Some of the 1902 observations were made on the owner’s second boat, the Silver
/Idle, a yawl of 130 tons. Dr. Wolfenden states that for all practical purposes the
work is as easy to accomplish from the smaller boat. The larger the tonnage the
greater the amount of wind required to sail the ship, and a good ‘ sailing breeze’ is
often too strong for satisfactory working of the instruments.

75

10 — 2

76

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

Table T. gives the characteristic numbers and the positions of the
stations at which observations were made.

Table II. gives the temperatures observed. Where the observations
were made with more than one instrument, the mean result is given ;
the differences rarely amounted to more than a few tenths of a degree
Fahrenheit. The original readings were made according to the

Fig. 6. — Map showing Positions of Stations and Line of Section.

Fahrenheit scale, and their consistency tested in the usual way by
plotting curves. It has been thought best to convert them to the
Centigrade scale, in which all the observations in the region already
published are given, and which is being employed in the International
investigations.

Table III. gives the salinities of the samples collected. The

The Hydrography of the Faeroe-Shetland Channel

77

chlorine titrations were carried out for me by Mr. J. J. Manley,
Magdalen College Laboratory, Oxford, and my best thanks are due to
him for his assistance. The salinities were originally obtained from
the chlorines by the use of the table which I published in the 1 Report
of the Fishery Board for Scotland ’ (No. 12, 1893, p. 381). They have
since been compared with Knudsen’s authoritative tables, issued
recently ; the differences were insignificant.1 I am indebted to my
friend, Mr. O. J. R. Howarth, for assistance in reducing, tabulating,
and plotting the results.

In arranging the material for discussion and comparison with other
observations, the first point to he noted was that the most important
series (and the only ones dealt with here) consist of nearly parallel
double lines of soundings, one line starting from near the north end of
the Shetlands, and another from near the south end, and both extending
to the Faeroes. An examination of all the Walwins observations, of
the observations made by the Jackal in the cruise of 1893, and again by
the Jackal in 1902 (see Helland- Hansen in Nature , vol. lxvi., p. 054),
indicated that these lines were so close together that tliev could for

O xJ

all practical purposes be regarded as one and the same. Two points,
in positions (approximately) Lat. 59° 56' N., Long. 1° 24' W., and
Lat. 61° 45' N., Long. 0° 48' W., were accordingly selected, and joined
on the chart by a straight line to which perpendiculars were drawn

1 In his paper on hydrographical investigations in the Faeroe-Shetland Channel,
etc., in the year 1902 (Report Cd. 2612, 1905), Helland-Hansen says: ‘Dickson’s
calculations of the salinities are partially based upon Pettersson’s tables. I have
found that these give the salinities higher by almost 0 08 per cent, than Knudsen’s
tables.’ I am unable to understand this, a comparison of my table with Ivnudsen’s
giving the following results :

Salinity.

Cl.

Knudaen.

Dickson.

Difference.

17-5

31-62

31-65

+ 0-03

18-0

32-52

32-54

+ 0-02

18-5

33-42

33-44

+ 0-02

190

34-33

34-33

000

19-5

35-23

35-23

o-oo

200

36-13

36-12

- 001

20-5

37-03

37-01

-0-02

H. N. D.

78

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

from the stations (Fig. 6). All the observations were then plotted
upon vertical sections along that line. The method is no doubt open
to criticism, but the errors introduced cannot exceed the errors incidental
to the observations, and it makes the most of the available material.

In the result, we have from the Walwins observations sections for
the following dates :

July, 1900.

May and June, 1901.

June and July, 1901.

May, 1902.

June, 1902.

July, 1902 (temperature only).

To these may be added, completing the existing record :

Jackal , August, 1893.

,, (preliminary report only), August, 1902,

making eight more or less complete pictures in all (Figs. 7 to 15). 1

In the Faeroe- Shetland Channel we have to deal with the opposing
movements of water from the south and from the north. The
northward -moving currents are of two kinds, (a) drift currents,
produced at the surface by the winds in the locality ; and (b) a stream
current, which I have {Phil. Trans. A ., vol. exevi., p. 113) proposed
to call the Norwegian branch of the European stream. This branch
forms part of a stream- current relieving the water banked up against
the Continental mass by the westerly winds ; it varies in strength
from year to year and from season to season, and its salinity also
varies slightly, a high salinity probably indicating a large proportion
of gulf-stream water, and a low salinity a large proportion of water
from the Labrador current and the northern area of the Atlantic.
Direct observations in the depth are still wanting, but the range of
salinity may be estimated at from 35‘4 per mille to 3 5-7 per mille.
The southward- moving currents are also of two kinds, (c) water from

1 In these sections the Shetland end of the line is on the light, the Faeroe end
on the left.

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

79

the central and western parts of the Norwegian sea, most of which has
probably originated in the area east and north-east of Newfoundland
and been carried across as a drift, mixing with the ‘ Irminger ’ and
‘Greenland’ branches of the European stream. If the European
stream is below its normal strength, it seems likely that this body of
water will attain unusual volume, and part of it will try to make its
way southward. The comparatively cold salt water observed by the
Jackal in 1893 (Station VIII.), and again by Helland-Hansen in the
Jackal in 1902 ( Nature , loc. cit .), in the north-western part of the North
Sea, is probably to be identified with it, as Helland-Hansen suggests,
and it seems likely that the importance of this factor has been under-
estimated by the earlier investigators, especially, perhaps, in my report
on the work of the Jackal in 1893. The second body of southward-
moving water (d) is that derived from the melting of ice in the Arctic
regions. This water is probably spread over the surface in summer
and autumn, and makes its way southward to the east of Iceland and
the Faeroe Islands. So far as the region under discussion is concerned,
it may probably be assumed that the water from the centre of the
Norwegian sea (c) has a salinity of 35 per mille to 35\3 per mille, and
that a salinity of less than 35 per mille indicates a large admixture of
water of Arctic origin (d).

The difficulty of interpreting the sections across the Faeroe- Shetland
Channel in the light of the above is immensely increased bv the fact
that the line of section lies just in the region where the waters from
the sources mentioned meet and mix, and that we have no simultaneous
observations in the regions of origin. The difficulty is specially
apparent in studying the distribution of temperature, for, unlike
salinity, temperature may change without movement or mixture of
the waters. The most important point is evidently to note that when
the circulation is active, isothermals and isohalines are crowded
together, showing strong gradients of temperature and saltness, while
weak gradients are an indication of weak circulation, the waters moving
slowly and being very completely mixed.

The general conditions controlling the movement and mixture of

80

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

waters are : (1) the Norwegian stream ( b ) is cut off below by the
Wyville- Thomson ridge at a depth of about 300 fathoms — north of
the ridge its waters are mixed with ice-cold water of slightly lower
sal indy drawn up by the ‘ undertow to an amount depending partly
on the velocity of the stream, and increasing with it (see ‘ Twelfth
Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland,’ p. 351) ; (2) the drift
current (a) and the European stream are independent of one another,
but where the former exists — i.e., as a northward-moving current — the
waters of (a) and (h) are likely to be indistinguishable by means of
either temperature or salinity observations ; (3) the southward-moving
waters (e) and (d) may be independent, and they may or may not be
fully mixed before entering the Faeroe- Shetland Channel ; (4) when the
northward-moving currents are strong, they will tend to he surface
currents, because of the relatively high temperature of the waters.
When they are weak, their waters will be cooled by contact and
mixture with the cold underlying waters. The southward-moving
waters will tend to be under-currents because of their low temperature,
and will only rise to the surface when they are exceptionally strong
relatively to the northward-moving currents, or when they contain an
unusually large proportion of, on the one hand, warm Norwegian sea-
water, or, on the other, fresh Arctic water.

Taking now the sections in order, the first is that for August,
1893, based on the Jackal observations. In the report on these
observations 1 expressed the opinion (p. 352) that the conditions were
there ‘ favourable to an increase of the Atlantic current,’ but at the
same time it was noted (p. 337) that during the observations the
navigating lieutenant of the ship found ‘ a southerly drift amounting
to approximately 10 miles in twenty-four hours.’ With the informa-
tion available at the time as to the sources from which the waters
were derived, it was impossible to identify clearly all the factors
involved, or to give a complete explanation of the movements going
on. I had to content myself with an attempt to discuss the mechanism
of the process of mixture of the northward and southward moving
waters, on the assumption that the former (« and b) were one, and the

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

81

latter (c and d) one. The difficulties which arose led me to undertake
an investigation of the movements of surface waters in the North
Atlantic, and, as a result, to separate the stream current (h) from the
surface drift (a) ; the resolution of the southward-moving waters into
( c ) and (7/) is chiefly the result of the observations of the Ingolf
expedition (1896) and of Professor Pettersson’s discussions. In the
light of these more recent conclusions, it appears from the section

Fig 7. — Faeroe-Shetland Channel. Temperature and Salinity, August, 1893.

H.M.S. ‘ Jackal.’

(Fig. 7) that in August, 1893, the Norwegian stream was running
strongly northward, its main centre lying on the eastern side of the
channel at a depth of about 80 fathoms, while its waters extended
nearly to the Faeroe Islands. The cold bottom water, which shows no
marked tendency to rise towards the surface, was entirely cut off from
a thin layer of relatively fresh surface water (salinity below 35*3),
which covered the whole surface of the channel to a depth of a few
fathoms, and near the Shetlands extended to the bottom. This layer
was probably, as Helland-Hansen has suggested, water from the

11

82

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

Norwegian sea (c), rather than a mixture of it with water which had
come from the south through the Faeroe- Shetland Channel, as I supposed
at the time. Its southward movement would account for its appearance
at Station VIII. in the north-west of the North Sea, referred to above,
and for the southerly drift of the Jackal during the observations.

The section for July, 1900 (Fig. 8), shows a state of affairs so
remarkable that if it were possible to doubt the accuracy of the

Fig. 8. — Faeroe-Shetland Channel Temperature and Salinity, July, 1900.

Yacht ‘ Walwtn.’

observations, one would be almost inclined to take refuge in doing so,
but the complete consistency of four sets of soundings makes the
supposition unreasonable. Salinity is at all depths remarkably high,
scarcely falling anywhere below 35-4. At a depth of 400 fathoms — be.,
100 fathoms below the Wyville-Thomson ridge, is a maximum of
salinity of 35'6, in water having a temperature of melting ice. Above
this is a mass of water of salinity about 35'4, the minimum occurring
with low temperature near the middle of the channel in about
250 fathoms. Above this, again, the saltest (35-6) and warmest water

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

83

lies on the east side of the channel, although close to the Shetlands
salinity falls again near the surface. This extraordinary distribution
seems to indicate that at an earlier date than that of the section,
probably in the previous winter, there had been a strong movement of
very salt water from the Norwegian stream and surface drift (« and b),
which from some external cause afterwards failed. Below 300 fathoms
the water, protected by the Wyville- Thomson ridge, remained

Fig. 9. — Faeroe- Shetland Channel. Temperature and Salinity, May and
June, 1901. Yacht ‘ Walwin.’

stationary, and was gradually cooled down to 0° C. by contact and
slight mixture with the water lying under it. Above 300 fathoms a
southward movement probably set in, lowering both temperature and
salinity, and this was followed, probably just before the date of the
section, by a re-establishment of the Norwegian stream (/>) in full
force, the water being somewhat salter, but the stream in almost the
same position as in 1893 (Fig. 7).

The season 1901 is represented by two sections (Figs. 9 and 10) ;
the observations forming the first were made between May 14 and

11—2

84

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

June 4 ; those forming the second between July 4 and July 16. Thus
the middle dates are May 24 and July 10, and a comparison is of
particular interest, because these are the first sets of observations which
have been made in this area at dates close enough to admit of direct
comparison, or to give any idea of the rate at which changes occur.
In both sections nearly the whole channel is tilled with water of
35'5 salinity or over, and in the depth temperature is low. The

Fig. 10. — Faeroe-Shetland Channel. Temperature and Salinity, June
and July, 1901. Yacht ‘ Walwin.’

freshest water (35-3) appears on the east side of the channel at a depth
of 380 fathoms, apparently indicating an intrusion of deep water from
the Norwegian sea into a mass of Atlantic water, which had been
cooled down in the same way as in the previous years. It is to be
observed that this centre of low salinity is also one of low temperature,
the readings at 300 and 400 fathoms rising from east to west. All the
western side of the channel is occupied by water of 35 5 salinity. In
the strata nearer the surface we find the first indication of the features
so strongly marked in 1902, in which the saltest and warmest waters

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

85

appear as two branches, one a little to the west of mid-channel, and
another on the east side, close to the land. In the interval between
May 24 and July 10 the distribution in the depth seems to have
become more uniform. In the depth the centre of low temperature
and salinity on the east side has disappeared, and apparently the whole
breadth of the channel is occupied by water of about 35'4 salinity. In
the upper layers the two branches of warm salt water are farther apart

Fig. 11. — Faeroe-Shetland Channel. Temperature and Salinity, May,
1902. Yacht ‘ Walwin.’

at the surface, the western member is more strongly marked, while at
intermediate depths (100 to 300 fathoms) salinity has increased slightly
on the east side, and diminished on the west. The differences point
in effect to a strengthening of both the northward and southward
moving streams above 300 fathoms, the latter keeping to the west,
while the former keeps to the east, but sends a narrow branch, 50 to
60 fathoms deep, along the western side. It is noteworthy that there
is no indication of a southward movement of fresher water towards
the Shetlands.

86

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

For the year 1902 we have four sections (Figs. 11 to 14), the middle
dates being May 24, June 24, July 21, and August 29. Some are, of
course, incomplete, and salinity observations are wanting for the
July section, but it seems possible to follow the course of events with
considerable certainty.

In the May section the first point to be noticed is the remarkably
low temperature and salinity in the depth. Up to within 200 fathoms
of the surface the salinity is about 35*2, slightly higher on the east

Fig. 12. — Faeroe-Shetland Channel. Temperature and Salinity, June,

1902. Yacht ‘ Walwin.’

side and lower on the west, while at that depth the temperature is
only 2°. Nearer the surface the northward flow of water is apparent,
the salinity rising above 35 ‘6 in warm water on the east side, and
scarcely falling below 35-5 on the west. In June it appears that the
northward movement had ceased altogether, and that a southward set
at all depths has begun, except on the west side of the channel, within
about 100 fathoms of the surface, where the conditions remain
practically unchanged. The surface salinity is now almost uniformly

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

87

35*4, and in the depth the isohalines of 35‘2 and 354 appear to have
moved eastwards. Temperature has fallen at the surface, become
more uniform down to the 100-fathom line, and fallen at 400 and
500 fathoms. The June observations reveal for the first time,
observations being wanting for May, a steep gradient of temperature
on the east side between 100 and 200 fathoms. The 2° reading at
Station A3 at 200 fathoms in May makes it likely that a similar
distribution existed during that month.

Fig. 13. — Faeroe-Shetland Channel. Temperature and Salinity, July,
1902. Yacht ‘ Walwin.’

In the July section the form of the isotherms shows a further
advance of cold water in the depth. Temperature has fallen generally,
and a wedge of cold water near Station A8 rises almost to the surface.
On either side of this, warm water, possibly parts of northward-
moving streams, extends down to something like 150 fathoms. In
the August section, drawn from the observations of H.M.S. Jackal
published in Nature , the cold wedge shows still further advance, and
its summit has shifted more into the centre of the channel. The low

88

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

salinity at all depths is quite the most remarkable feature of the
section, indicating an unusually large proportion of water of Arctic
origin in the Norwegian sea. This water appears to he moving south-
wards in mid-channel, both at the surface and in the depth, a slight
weakening being apparent between 50 and 100 fathoms, where the
salinity rises above 35T. On the western side the increase of salinity
is so slight as to make it doubtful if any northward movement is

Fig. 14. — Faeroe-Shetland Channel. Temperature and Salinity, August,

1902. H.M.S. ‘Jackal.’

taking place ; it seems more likely that the 3 5 '4 water observed there
in June is merely undergoing mixture with the fresher water, a view
supported to some extent by its steady temperature. A northward
movement is, however, apparent on the eastern side, where the
temperature is relatively high, and the salinity rises above 35‘4.

We may summarize these results as follows : —

1893. — Both northward and southward moving; streams strong;.
The Norwegian stream occupied most of the channel in the inter-
mediate depths ; below it water was moving southwards, and on the

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

89

surface a thin layer also moved southward ; this layer became thicker
on both sides, and near the Shetlands extended to the bottom.

1900. — The whole channel is occupied by water from the south,
northward movement having apparently been strong earlier in the
season. At the date of the observations (July) little movement was
in progress, but there are indications of intrusion of water from the
north at a depth of about 300 fathoms, and at the surface on the east
side.

1901. — There are indications of feeble southward movement in the
depth, but most of the channel is occupied by water which has come
from the south. A weak northerly movement is apparent near the
surface, with some tendency to split into two branches, one west of
mid-channel, the other near the east side.

1902. — Unusually cold fresh water tilled the channel, at all depths
below 150 fathoms, throughout the season. In May the surface
waters were of southern origin, and were moving northward, but as
the season progressed, southward movement increased both at the
surface and in the depth, especially in mid-channel, the waters mixing
with and driving out those of southern origin on each side. That this
movement extended far to the southward is shown by the fact that an
ice-doe was met with during July off the Treshinish Islands, on the
west side of Mull. The summer of 1902 was one of the worst on
record in the Faeroe-Shetland Channel, and hydrographical work was
exceedingly difficult.

A comparison of the 1902 sections with the admirable charts of
surface temperature published as insets in the British ‘ Pilot Chart of
the North Atlantic ’ shows in the clearest manner the relation between
the surface movements in the open ocean and the currents in the
channel. In May the surface temperature was normal, or slightly
below it, between the west coast of the British Isles and about Bong.
15° W. Farther west, and to the north-west, there was a narrow band
ot water above the normal temperature, obviously supplying the water
which was going northward on the east side of the channel. In June
temperature was apparently below the normal over the whole of the

12

90

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

surface of the eastern Atlantic, and in the subsequent months the area
of low temperature gradually narrowed, until in October it had entirely
disappeared.

I hope to obtain data with regard to atmospheric pressure similar
to those embodied in the Pilot Chart for October, for the earlier
months, and to discuss their relation to the observations in the Faeroe-
Shetland Channel in a later paper. The Pilot Charts in their present
form will he an invaluable help in interpreting the observations to be
made under the international scheme, and, as Dr. Wolfenden informs
me that he intends to make simultaneous observations at depths down
to 1 ,000 fathoms to the west of Ireland, the mechanism of the currents
flowing from the central region should be completely and finally
determined.

The conclusions arrived at up to the present may be stated thus :

1. Northward movement of water originating as a drift current is
strongest in the Faeroe-Shetland Channel during winter.

2. Northward movement of water oriodnatino; as a stream current

o o

is strongest in summer, being probably due to the extension of the
‘ Atlantic anticyclone.’

3. The northward movement 2 is the more uncertain, and varies
most in different years.

4. In the transition stages between 1 and 2, or when 2 is abnor-
mally weak, the water in the Faeroe-Shetland Channel may remain
practically motionless for extended periods. If the channel is filled
with water from the south, this water will gradually cool down and
sink, being cooled by, and mixing with, the cold underlying waters.

5. To the north of the Faeroe-Shetland Channel the waters of the
Norwegian sea consist of a mixture of waters of Arctic origin with
those of Atlantic origin, the latter very similar to 1. The mixture is
in most cases fairly complete, but during summer water of Arctic
origin, set free by the melting of ice, may form a surface layer of
considerable thickness.

6. The waters of the Norwegian sea make their way southward,
under favourable conditions, into the Faeroe-Shetland Channel and

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

91

the North Sea. The entrance to the North Sea is probably effected
every year, as there is no opposing northerly current on the western
side. In the Faeroe -Shetland Channel the southward movement is
normally prevented by the northerly currents 1 and 2, except at
depths below 300 fathoms, where the northward currents are cut
off by the Wyville-Thomson ridge, and at the surface, where there
may be a southerly drift current. In exceptional cases, as in 1902,
the northerly movement may be in abeyance, and water may move
southward at all depths. It seems likely that the presence of this
water in the North Sea has a special bearing on biological and fishery
questions.

7. The movements of the surface waters of the sea and the tem-
perature of the air near the British Isles do not stand in any direct
relation of cause and effect. Northerly winds bring cold weather, and
by drifting and ‘banking’ cold water from higher latitudes, bring cold
surface water with them. Southerly winds bring warm weather, and
bring warm water from low latitudes in the same way. The tempera-
ture of the surface water in the open sea influences the distribution of
atmospheric pressure, as Pettersson has shown, and it will therefore
affect the direction of the prevailing winds, but motion has nothing to
do with this influence.

TABLE I.'

List of ‘ Walwin ’ Stations.

Station.

Lat. N.

Long. W.

Station.

Lat. N.

Long. W.

A1

O /

60 40

O /

2 50

A10

o /

60 17

o t

3 5

A2

60 54

3 40

All

60 27

3 50

A3

61 16

4 41

B1

60 51

6 22

A3i

61 28

4 50

B2

60 17

6 22

A4

61 32

5 20

B3

59 46

6 20

A 5

61 45

6 02

B4

60 00

5 20

A6

61 34

6 20

III.

Off Fitful Head.

A7

61 14

6 08

IV.

West of Yell sound.

A8

61 00

5 30

V.

Off Flugga

L. II.

A9

60 45

4 50

VI.

East of Bressay.

1 For numbers and positions of the Jackal stations in 1893 and 1902, see ‘Twelfth Report
of the Fishery Board for Scotland,’ p. 364, and Nature, vol. lxvi., p. 654.

12—2

92

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

TABLE IL

Temperature Observations.

Date.

1

Depth.

ad

o> 0

H

I

Date.

Position.

Depth.

Temp.

| 0 c.

Fath.

1

M.

Fath.

M.

1899.

I

1900.

July 1

8 miles off Hoy Hd.

0

0

10-6

Mar. 1

Station IV.

0

0

5-0

30

55

10-0

11

58

106

5-8

55

N. of Westray ...

0

0

10-6

„ 3

Station V.

0

0

6-1

5 5

40

73

106

n

11

53

97

6-4

5 5

S. W. of Sumburgh

„ 4

Station VI.

0

0

6-1

Hd.

0

0

9-7

11

59

108

6-1

,,

65

119

8-9

„ 6

Station III.

0

0

6-1

„ 3

N.W. of Yell sound

o

0

11-7

1 1

11

70

128

6-1

,,

50

91

10-8

23 1

Station IV.

0

0

6-1

55

N. E.of Lamba Ness

0

0

11-7

55

101

6-1

5 5

55

101

9-4

„ 24

Station V.

0

0

5-8

„ 4

E. of Bressay

0

0

12-2

„

11

47

86

6-4

5 5

55

101

8Y

,, 27

Station VI.

0

0

5-0

,,

E. of Fair Isle ...

0

0

10-0

11

50

91

5-8

55

5 5 5 5 . . .

60

110

8-6

„ 30

Station III.

0

0

4-4

E. of Copinshay ...

0

o !

10-6

1 1

11

64

117

5-6

5 1 15 • • •

43

79

8-9

Apr. 21

Station IV.

0

o

6-7

Oct. 14

8 miles off Hoy Hd.

0

0

10-6

1 1

11 • • •

53

97

6-4

,,

40

73 1

11-1

„ 22

Station V.

0

0

6-7

„ 21

Station IY.

0

0

9-4

1 1

54

99

6-7

55

59

108

10-6

„ 24

Station VI.

0

0

6-4

» 23

Station Y.

0

0

9'7

„

11

65

119

6-4

55

55

101

10-3

„ 27

Station III.

0

0

5-8

„ 27

Station VI.

0

0

9-4

11

65

119

5-8

55

15

52

95

111

May 24

Station V.

0

0

8-4

Nov. 10

Station III.

0

0

7-2

,,

54

99

7-2

55

• 5 * * *

55

101

8-1

„ 25

Station IV.

0

0

8-6

„ 25

Station IY.

0

o

6-9

64

117

7-2

..

60

110

9-4

„ 26

Station III.

0

0

6-9

„ 27

Station V.

0

o

8-3

11

66

121

6-4

5 5

15

52

95

9-2

June 9

17 miles W.N.W.

Dec. 3

Station VI.

o

0

7-2

of Flugga L. H.

0

0

8-4

55

,,

50

91

8-9

,,

66

121

8-4

„ o

Station III.

0

0

6-7

• 1

6 miles off Yrell

,,

15 • • *

I 55

101

8-9

sound ...

0

0

8-1

„ 15

Station IV.

0

0

6-9

55

101

7-2

55 • • •

40

73

8-6

„ 12

Station IV.

0

0

10-0

„ 18

i Station V.

0

0

7 2

72

132

8-6

,,

5 5 • • •

56

102

8-6

„ 13

10 miles S.S.W. of

1900.

IV

0

0

9-2

Jan. 1

Station VI.

0

o

7'2

1 1

60

110

7-8

52

95

7-8

,,

Station III.

0

0

8-6

Station III.

0

0

7-5

,,

62

113

7-5

55

55 • • •

59

108

8Y

July 11

Station A1

0

0

13-3

„ 30

Station IV.

0

0

7-5

,,

11 • • •

50

91

11-1

55

53

97

8Y

100

183

10-6

Feb. 9

Station V.

0

0

7-2

150

274

9-4

15

54

99

7-5

Station A2

0

0

11-1

., 14

Station VI.

0

o

6Y

11

50

91

7-2

15 . . .

46

84

6-9

100

183

7-2

55

Station III.

0

0

5-8

„ 12

Station A3

0

0

111

„

1 61

I 111

6-7

,,

11 • •

50

91

8-1

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel 93

Table II. — Temperature Observations ( continued ).

Date.

Position.

Depth.

Temp.

°C.

Date.

Position.

Depth.

Temp.

°C.

Fath.

M.

Fath.

M.

1900.

1901.

•July 13

Station A4

0

0

10-3

May 15

Station A2

300

549

0T

55

50

91

7-9

,,

400

732

-0-6

93

170

7-2

55

500

914

-1-0

Station A5

0

0

111

„ 21

Station A3

0

0

8-9

55

50

91

7-9

55

11 ...

45

82

7-3

84

154

7-9

,,

11 ...

100

183

6'8

„ 21

Station A6

0

0

10-6

,,

,,

200

366

4-7

...

100

183

8T

,,

55

300

549

1-2

Station A7

0

0

10-6

5 5

55 ...

400

732

-0-2

51

50

91

8T

51

Station A4

0

0

8-9

„ 22

Station A8

0

0

11-4

51

45

82

7-5

55

100

183

7-8

11

115

210

6-7

11 • • •

350

640

0-6

55

120

220

6-7

„ 23

Station A9

0

0

11-7

1 1

Station A5

0

0

8 9

11 • • '

100

183

8-9

55

90

165

6-7

Aug. 28

10 miles N.E. 4 N.

„ 29

Station A6

0

0

9'2

from Station A1

0

0

12-2

,,

45

82

7-5

55

51

50

91

9'4

55

100

183

6-8

15

,,

100

183

9-2

55

145

265

6-7

,,

55

200

366

8-4

51

150

274

6-7

51

20 miles N.N.E. of

280

512

7-8

,,

Station A7

0

0

9-2

1 1

45

82

7-8

Station A1

0

0

12-2

55

80

146

6-7

„

51 11

80

146

91

15

15 ...

135

247

6-7

55

150

274

8-4

June 3

Station A8

0

0

10-4

,,

250

457

6T

,,

45

82

8T

5 5

55 11

350

640

-0'6

5 5

100

183

6-7

„ 29

Station A2

0

0

11-4

,,

200

366

5-7

11

50

91

8-5

,,

Station A9

255

467

4-2

,,

11 • • •

100

183

7-4

1 1

0

0

10-8

,,

11

200

366

5-3

55

45

82

7-5

55

11

300

549

DO

55

55 ...

100

183

6-4

55

55

400

732

o-o

200

366

4-7

Oct. 4

11 • • •

500

914

-0-7

55

300

549

0-8

Station III.

0

0

9-4

51

Station All

400

732

-0-3

55

Station IV.

70

128

10-0

» 4

0

0

10'6

„ io

0

0

10-0

50

91

8-9

55

15

75

104

10-6

51

100

183

8’4

„ 16

Station V.

0

0

8-9

51

11

Station A1

200

366

8-4

55

5 5 • • •

75

137

10-0

„ 19

0

0

9-7

„ 19

Station VI.

0

0

10-0

50

91

9-0

„

55

57

104

10'0

15 ...

100

183

8-4

1901.

,,

Station A2

110

201

8-4

Jaa. 12

Station IV.

o

0

7-8

„ 20

0

0

10-0

„

Station V.

62

113

7-8

5 1

45

82

9-1

„ 19

0

0

7-2

15

100

183

8-5

,,

11 • • •

55

101

7-8

5 5

200

366

4-4

Feb. 2

Station VI.

0

0

6T

,,

300

549

0T

55

11

60

110

7-2

5 5

400

732

-0-3

55

Station III.

0

0

5-6

,,

11

Station A1

500

914

-0-7

55

i1 ...

62

113

6-7

July 27

0

0

12-5

May 14

Station A1

0

0

9-7

55

45

82

9-4

55

15 • • •

114

209

8-6

15

80

146

8-9

„ 15

Station A2

0

0

9-2

,,

130

238

8-6

,,

45

82

7-4

,,

Station A2

0

0

12-2

55

51

100

183

6-1

,,

45

82

9-2

55

55

200

366

3-0

55 ...

100

183

7-8

94

The Hydrography of the Faeme- Shetland Channel

Table II. — -Temperature Observations ( continued ).

Date.

Position.

Depth.

.

go

<D o

EH

Date.

Position.

Depth.

go

0) o

EH

Fatli.

M.

Fath.

M.

1901.

1902.

July 27

Station A2

500

914

-0'7

J une 29

Between A1 and A 10

120

220

8-9

1902.

July 9

6 miles inside A1 . . .

0

0

10-0

May 17

Station A1

0

0

10-8

80

146

8-4

11

100

183

61

„ 15

Station A2

0

0

10-0

„ 18

Station A2

0

0

7-8

50

91

7'8

,,

400

732

-0T

100

183

6-7

1 1

500

914

-0'6

,,

Station A3

200

366

3-9

11

11 **•
Station A3

608

1112

-IT

0

0

9-4

n 20

0

0

8-4

50

91

7-8

11

50

91

7'2

100

183

6-7

,,

100

183

6T

11 • • •
Station A4

200

366

3'9

200

366

1-9

„ 16

0

0

9-4

300

549

0-6

...

Station A 5

120

220

7-8

1 1

400

732

0-2

„ 17

0

0

8-4

„ 21

Station A4

0

0

7-2

75

137

7'8

,,

50

91

6-7

„ 20

Station A6

0

0

10-6

1 1

108

198

6-7

-

120

220

7-8

June 1

Station B3

0

0

8-6

1 1

Station A7

0

0

8-9

,,

50

91

8-4

120

220

6-9

11

100

183

7'2

„ 21

8 miles E. of A8 ...

0

0

9-7

„ 19

Station A1

0

0

9-2

1 1

50

91

7-2

,,

110

201

7'8

100

183

5-0

„ 21

Station A2

0

0

8-4

200

366

1-9

,,

200

366

3'9

260

476

IT

„ 22

Station A3

0

0

7-8

Station A9

0

0

10-0

Station A4

0

0

7-9

50

91

9-4

11

50

91

7-5

100

183

8-9

1 1

110

201

7'2

200

366

2-2

,,

Station A5

0

0

8T

1 1

400

732

PI

11

11

Station A6

55

101

7-2

11 miles S. of All

500

914

-0-6

„ 26

0

0

8-6

„ 22

0

0

10-6

11

110

201

7-2

80

146

8-9

„ 27

Between A7 andA8

0

0

8-9

Station A10

0

0

9-4

11

155

284

6-7

80

146

8-6

LO

00

Between A2 and A9

0

0

9'4

Aug. 1

17 miles off Foula

75

137

8-4

5?

50

91

7-8

Station A1

0

0

11-4

5 1

100

183

7-2

10 miles S. of A2...

110

201

8-9

11

200

366

2-8

„ 3

0

0

10'6

11

300

549

0-6

100

183

6-7

11

400

732

-0-3

200

366

3-9

11

500

914

-11

300

549

0-3

11

Station A2

0

0

9-4

400

732

-0-6

11

50

91

8-4

500

914

-IT

,,

100

183

6-7

„ 5

10 miles S. of A9...

0

0

10-7

200

366

4-4

200

366

8-4

» 1

300

549

1-4

400

732

o-o

5)

400

732

-06

Station B4

500

914

-0-6

11

500

914

-0-7

0

0

11-7

11

600

1097

-IT

150

274

9-2

„ 29

Between A1 and A10

0

0

9-4

11

11

260

476

'8-4

h c5

D ^

5 3

Sfg

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

95

TABLE III.
Salinity Observations.

Depth.

M

di
° '■g

Depth.

Date.

Position.

Cl.

o* g

Position.

F'th.

M.

ra3 u

m ©

F'th.

M.

1900.

1901.

May 24

Y.

0

0

19-59

35-40

53

Jan.

19

V.

0

o

>) 25

IV.

0

0

19-67

35-54

54

,,

,,

112

205

,, 26

III.

0

0

19-66

35-52

55

Feb.

2

III.

0

0

June 3

III.

0

0

19-63

35-47

56

,,

130

238

„ 12

IY.

0

0

19-66

35-52

57

„

VI.

0

0

„ 13

III.

0

0

19-77

35-72

58

153

280

July 11

A1

0

0

19-58

35-38

59

May 14

A1

0

0

100

183

19-74

35"66

60

,,

57

104

150

274

19-67

35-54

61

yy

114

209

yy

A2

400

732

19-70

35-59

62

,,

yy

0

0

yy

,

500

914

19-67

35-54

63

yy

15

A2

0

0

„ 12

A2

0

0

19-65

35-50

64

100

183

yy

100

183

19-65

35-50

65

200

366

yy

200

366

19-68

35-56

66

yy

300

549

yy

300

549

19 61

35"43

67

,,

400

732

yy

A3

0

0

19-65

35-50

68

500

914

yy

yy

100

183

19-65

35-50

69

I 60° 43' N.'|

0

0

yy

200

366

19-63

35-47

y >

I 3° 22' W. )

yy

300

549

19-58

35-38

70

1 60° 35' N. i

0

0

„ 13

A4

0

0

19-61

35-43

”

I 2° 25' W. f

yy

50

91

19-63

35-47

71

21

A3

0

0

yy

A5

90

165

19-61

35-43

72

,,

,,

100

183

,,

0

0

19-61

35-43

73

yy

yy

200

366

yy

yy

50

91

19-61

35-43

74

,,

300

549

yy

80

146

19-60

35-41

75

,,

400

732

„ 20

A 7

0

0

19-67

35-54

76

,,

A4

0

0

,, 21

A6

0

0

19-61

35-43

77

,,

80

146

A7

100

183

19-65

35-50

78

:

115

210

150

274

19-61

35-43

79

.

A5

0

0

„ 22

A8

0

0

19-65

35-50

80

80

146

yy

100

183

19-65

35-50

81

29

A6

0

0

yy

150

274

19-65

35-50

82

100

183

yy

250

457

19-60

35-41

83

? ,

150

274

yy

350

640

19-61

35-43

84

A7

0

0

yy

A9

450

823

1967

35-54

85

80

146

„ 23

0

0

19-67

35-54

86

130

238

yy

,,

100

183

19-65

35-50

87

f 61° 37' N.l

0

0

yy

250

457

19-58

35-38

”

i 6° 18' W. 1

yy

350

640

19-72

35"63

88

30

f 61° 30' N.)

0

0

yy

yy

440

805

19-75

35-68

yy

\6° 37' W.J

Oct. 4

hi.

35

64

19-65

35-50

89

June

3

A8

0

0

yy

yy

70

128

19-59

35-40

90

100

183

yy

IV.

0

0

19-67

35-54

91

200

366

„ 10

30

55

19-67

35-54

92

255

467

yy

yy

57

104

19-73

35-64

93

A9

0

0

„ 16

V.

70

128

19-76

35-70

94

„

100

183

yy

yy

35

64

19-61

35-43

95

200

366

„ 19

VI.

30

55

19-60

35-41

96

300

549

yy

yy

57

104

19-39

35-03

97

400

732

„ 20
1901.

IV.

0

0

19-65

35-50

98

f 60° 56' N. I
l 5° 18' W. f

0

0

Jan. 12

IV.

0

0

19-59 I 35-40

99

4

All

0

0

yy

>>

115

210

19-71

35-61

100

yy

100

183

Cl.

Salinity
per Mille.

19-51

35-25

19-61

35-43

19-63

35-47

19-59

35-40

19-60

35-41

19-65

35-50

19-71

35-61

19-72

35-63

19-67

35-54

19-74

35-66

19-70

35-59

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-53

35-28

19-61

35-43

19-69

35-58

19-76

35-70

19-69

35-58

19-67

35-54

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-66

35-52

19-65

35-50

19-63

35-47

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-63

35-47

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-70

35-59

19-81

35-79

19-69

35-58

19-69

35-58

19-66

35-52

19-65

35-50

19-67

35-54

19-63

35-47

19-65

35-50

19-61

35-43

19-65

35-50

19-65

35-50

19-72

35-63

19-78

35-73

96

The Hydrography of the Faeroe- Shetland Channel

Table III. — Salinity Observations ( continued ).

No. of
Sample.

Position.

Depth.

Cl.

>~-r^

^ o5
o -g

Date.

Position.

Depth.

Cl.

-M r— <

P’th.

M.

;£j

d u

m qj
a

o B
A

F’th.

M.

1901.

1902.

101

June

4

All

200

366

19-68

35-56

133

May 17

A1

0

0

19-74

35-66

102

f 60° 37' N.'i
\3° 30' "W. /

0

0

19-71

35-61

134

135

» J

A3

50

100

91

183

19-72

19-65

35-62

35-50

103

19

A1

0

0

19-68

35-56

136

„ 20

0

0

19-69

35-57

104

50

91

19-71

35-61

137

100

183

19-61

35-43

105

100

183

19-71

35-61

138

200

366

19-43

3510

106

July

4

0

0

19-70

35-59

139

300

549

19-50

3523

107

80

146

19-71

35-61

140

400

732

19-48

35-19

108

115

210

19-69

35-58

141

„ 21

A 4

0

0

19-63

35-46

109

5

A 2

0

0

19-67

35-54

142

A 6

100

183

19-60

35-41

110

100

183

19-67

35-54

143

„ 30

0

0

19-63

35-46

111

??

200

366

19-66

35-52

144

100

183

19-59

35-39

112

? 1

300

549

19-65

35-50

145

31

B1

0

0

19-65

35-50

113

,,

400

732

19-63

35-47

146

June 1

B2

0

0

19-72

35-62

114

..

500

914

19-65

35-50

147

B3

0

0

1979

35-75

115

6

A3i

0

0

19-65

35-50

148

„ 19

A1

0

0

19-62

35-44

116

100

183

19-63

35-47

149

100

183

19-59

35-39

117

A4

220

403

19-66

35-52

150

,, 21

A2

0

0

19-60

35-41

118

o

0

19-67

35 54

151

„ 22

A3

0

0

19-60

35-41

119

,,

80

146

19-65

35-50

152

Ji?

100

183

19-57

35-35

120

6

},

110

201

19-65

35-50

153

,,

200

366

19-59

35-39

121

,>

7

A5

0

0

19-65

35 50

154

99

A4

0

0

19-61

35-43

122

14

A6

0

0

19-70

35-59

155

100

183

19-60

35-41

123

V

45

82

19-65

35-50

156

A5

0

0

19-63

35 46

124

100

183

19-68

35-56

157

„ 26

A6

0

0

19-60

35-41

125

A7

0

0

19-72

35"63

158

Between

100

183

19-59

35 39

126

J J

50

91

19-71

35-61

159

„ 27

127

,,

120

220

19-63

35-47

A 7 and A8

0

0

I9 60

35-41

128

15

A8

0

0

19-66

35-52

160

155

284

1959

35-39

129

' ”

100

183

19-65

35-50

161

„ 28

Between

130

200

366

19-70

35-59

A2 and A9

200

366

19 48

35-19

131

>>

266

487

19-61

35-43

162

J)

400

732

19-42

35-08

132

”

16

A9

400

732

19-63

35-47

II.— HY I )ROGR APHICAL OBSERVATIONS
NORTH ATLANTIC DURING 1903
BOARD DR. WOLFENDEN’S YACHT

By H. N. Dickson, M.A , D.Sc.

MADE IN THE
AND 1904 ON
‘SILVER BELLE’

In the summer of 1903 the Silver Belle made two cruises. One,
to the west of Ireland, during June and July, gave a valuable
section alonff the meridian of Lons-. 12° W. from Eat. 51° N. to

O O

Lat. 54° 45', besides other stations. A second, in August, gave two
lines across the entrance to the Faeroe-Shetland Channel, one south
of the Wyville-Thomson ridge, and one a little to the north of it,
as well as a longitudinal section from the south of the ridge north-
wards so as to connect with the observations of the International
Council, which were made almost at the same time. The total
number of soundings made was twenty- two, and at each station
temperature observations were made and samples collected.

During 1904 the Silver Belle made a still more extended voyage.
Starting from the south-west of Ireland on June 20, a line of twenty
soundings at depths down to 2,000 fathoms was run to the Azores.
Temperature observations were made at all the stations, and samples
were collected at six.

The next line was from the Azores to Madeira, and thence to
Gibraltar, through the Straits and eastward in the Mediterranean as
far as Long. 3° 41' W. This line includes soundings at twenty-two
stations ; samples were collected at eight.

The third and last line runs westwards from Gibraltar to about
Lons;. 10° W., then northwards to the mouth of the English Channel
connecting with the line of the International Council. On this line

97 13

98 Hydrographical Observations , North Atlantic , 1903 and 1904

there are fifteen stations, at all of which temperatures were observed ;
samples were collected at two.

The samples brought home numbered 139 in 1903, and, by an odd
coincidence, 139 in 1904. The chlorines of all these samples have
been determined by Mr. .1. J. Manley in the laboratory at Magdalen
College, Oxford, the methods employed being the same as in previous
years. With regard to these determinations, it should be noted that
a comparison of the values at the International Station Sc. 19a and
Silver Belle station F9 shows perfect agreement. While analyzing
the samples brought home by the Discovery expedition, Mr. Manley
received a sample of the standard sea-water issued bv the Inter-
national Council. Chlorine determined differed from chlorine given
by 1 part in 3,500. The Discovery samples were treated in precisely
the same way as those of the Silver Belle , and there can, therefore, be
no doubt that the values are strictly comparable with those of the
International investigations. At my request Professor Pettersson also
had the chlorines of some of the gas samples sent to him (see below)
determined. A comparison of these values with those of Mr. Manley
show somewhat serious differences :

S A I.I NIT V PI

on Mii/i.e.

No. of
Sample.

Pettersson.

Manley.

Difference.

7

- 3551

35 70

-019

17

- 35-61

35-82

-0-21

18

- 35 23

35-41

-018

89

- 3613

36-62

-0-49

103

- 36 44

36-58

-014

117

- 38-35

38 62

-0-27

124

- 36 20

35-90

- 0-30

The complete agreement which exists between the values as plotted
and those of the International sections, and in the determinations with
standard water, makes it very difficult to account for these discrepancies.

Table I. gives the positions of the stations for 1903 and their
characteristic numbers.

Table II. gives the observations for 1903, with the chlorine values
(Cl), salinities (P), and specific gravities in situ (<x*), of the samples.

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 99

Table III. gives the data for the 1904 cruise. The positions of
the sounding stations are given on the charts (Plates I. and II.).

A number of samples for gas analysis were collected during the
1904 cruise. The tubes were sent to Professor Pettersson, in Stock-
holm, and the analyses carried out by Miss A. Palmquist in the
Hogskolas Laboratorium. The results are given in Table IV.
Column 1 gives the number of the station, as in Table III. ; columns 2
and 3 the depths from which the samples were obtained; column 4 the
amount of nitrogen (N2), measured in c.c. at 0° C., 700 mm.
pressure, absorbed in 1 litre of the sample ; column 5 the amount
of oxygen (02), measured at the same temperature and pressure,
absorbed in 1 litre of the sample ; column 6 gives the amount
of oxygen expressed in per cent, of the whole gas absorbed — i.e.,
100 02
n2 + o2

in 1 litre under the same conditions. This carbonic acid is partly
absorbed, partly in chemical combination.

With reference to these analyses, Miss Palmquist writes :

‘Several tubes were so thinly drawn out that it looked as if they
were melted together, though they really were open. If a tube is
open, the nitrogen and oxygen can, of course, not be analyzed, and
usually I do not either determine the carbonic acid, as the result often
becomes too high. But as the opening of these tubes was so very
capillary, I thought it better to analyze them ; the results are
marked “ ?”

‘ The point of the tube from Station 41, 150 fathoms, was quite
broken, and the result is obviously too high.

‘ Both of the samples from Station <3, 1,200 fathoms, were not
melted together. The air bubble in one of these tubes being rather
small, and the thin tube being quite tilled up with water, I thought it
just possible that the nitrogen and oxygen might be correctly deter-
mined. Although the result was too high, and some air must have
come into the tube, something might be got out of the analysis. The
deep water at the Stations 2 and 8 seems to be about the same, and the

13—2

; column 7 the amount of carbonic acid (C02) measured

100 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

nitrogen in this sample might be supposed to be about 14-40 c.c. per
litre. The nitrogen that has come into the tube from the atmosphere
then amounts to 19*79 — 14*40 = 5'39 c.c. per litre, and the oxygen
may be calculated at 1*43 c.c. per litre (air =79 per cent. N".,, 21 per
cent. 02). The water sample should have 14*40 c.c. N2, 5*94 c.c. 02,
29 T 7 per cent. 02.’

Column 8 of the table gives the temperature in situ of the sample
(Table III.), and column 9 the temperature of saturation calculated
from the amount of nitrogen by a graphical extension of Hamberg’s
table. These values of T, which do not profess to be more than
approximations, are of great interest, but their number is too small to
justify full discussion.

Two points arise out of these analyses. The large amount of
carbonic acid in the deeper Mediterranean waters is very remarkable,
for, as Professor Pettersson has pointed out to me, in the Scandinavian
fjords the amount of C02 per litre never exceeds 50 to 51 c.c. even if
the oxygen has been reduced by the action of animal life to 4 or 5 per
cent, of the normal. Yet it is suggested that these Mediterranean
waters are of Atlantic origin. The second point is the occurrence of
a minimum of oxygen in the Atlantic at a depth of 500 to 600 fathoms.
This confirms the results of the temperature and salinity observations,
and suggests that in this particular case at least the method of gas
analysis is the most sensitive. It seems well to defer further dis-
cussion until the observations of Dr. Wolfenden’s 1905 cruises are
available.

As has been stated, the soundings may be conveniently grouped in
a series of sections. The stations in each section are as follows :

1903.

Section I. ...

Stations F3, F9, Sc. 19a, Sc. 15a.

„ II. ...

F4, F9, Sc. 19a, Sc. 15a.

., HI. ...

F5, F4, F3, F2, FI.

;, iv. ...

„ F7, F8, F9.

Y. ...

E15, E16.

„ VI. ...

E15, E14, E13, E12, Ell
E10, E9, E8, E7, E5.

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 101

Section I. ...

„ II. ...

„ III. ...

„ IV. ...

1904.

Stations 1 to 20.

„ 22 to 31, 33 to 44.

,, 48 to 51, 53 to 59.

,, 15 and 53, salinity only.

Of the 1903 sections, Section I. forms a line running north-eastward
nearly along the centre of the.Faeroe-Shetland Channel. It is extended
northwards by the use of two of the International stations, the data
being extracted from the Bulletin. The dates of the observations are :

Station F3

„ F9

,, Sc. 19a
,, Sc. 15a

August

11

11

6

17

20

11

18

So that they may be regarded as fully comparable.

Section II. is the same as Section I., except that it begins at
Station F4, more to the westward.

Section III. extends practically from the Faeroe Bank to off the
Flannan Isles, right across the southern entrance of the channel.

Section IV. is roughly parallel to Section III., hut farther north,
beyond the Wyville-Thomson ridge. It begins on the Faeroe Bank,
hut ends at Station F9, in mid-channel.

Sections V. and VI. are off' the west coast of Ireland. The two
Stations, E15 and E16, are nearly east and west of one another ; hence
Section V. gives some idea of the changes of distribution from the sea
towards the land. Section VI. runs due north and south across the
shallow bank to the West of Ireland. The middle of the section almost
touches the 100-fathom line, and there is deep water at both ends.

The Sections I., II., and III. for 1904 follow the three lines already
described. Section I. extends from the South-West of Ireland to the
Azores, Section II. from the Azores through the Straits of Gibraltar
into the Mediterranean, and Section III. from a point (Station 38)
south of Cape St. Vincent to opposite the mouth of the English
Channel, in line with the International Station E4. Sections IV. and

102 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

V. connect up points on the other lines with Station 53, the chief
station on Section III. at which samples were taken.

Perhaps the most striking result of the minute study of special
parts of the sea which has been made during recent years is the recog-
nition of the wide range of variation in the movements of waters from
season to season and from year to year. It has been shown that not
only in enclosed areas like the North Sea, where varying land influences
are important, but in the open ocean itself, the currents are constantly
changing in direction and speed of movement, and the same parts of
the ocean are occupied at different times by water derived from widely
different sources.

An immediate consequence of this discovery is that the problems
of oceanography are vastly more difficult of complete solution than
was supposed. It is now practically impossible to draw general
conclusions as to the circulation in a given area from one set of
observations, however complete ; the records must extend over a
number of years, and include different seasons of the year precisely as
in meteorology.

Under these circumstances it seems useless to attempt a general
discussion of Dr. Wolfenden’s observations. They form a very
valuable contribution, probably the. most valuable ever made by a
private individual, at least in this country, to the steadily increasing
amount of material ; but the discussion of the 1903 observations really
involves the whole question which it is one of the main objects of the
International Council to elucidate, and the 1904 observations refer to
an area about which we have not as yet anything like as much
information as we have about the Faeroe- Shetland Channel. It is
permissible, however, to state shortly the main features of the dis-
tributions shown by the sections, and to compare them where possible
with those of other years.

1903. — The sections enumerated above, and the sections ‘ Faeroe-
Shetland,’ I. and IF, for the same period, published by the Inter-
national Council, suggest that the events of 1902 are being repeated,

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 103

but at a much later date, and with less intensity. A wedge of water
of salinity over 35-5 lies with its axis passing almost directly through
Stations F4 and F9, and the same axis of maximum salinity passes
through Stations Sc. 19a and Sc. 15a, although the actual values are
lower. A quantity of water of salinity over 35-5 also appears at the
bottom at Station F2, Section III. ; and at Station E1G, Section Y.,
there is a maximum of salinity (over 35*5) at a depth of about
120 fathoms. If we compare the May and August observations at the
International Stations Sc. 19a and Sc. 15a, we find that while salinity
is higher at the former station in August than in May, at the latter
station it is lower.

Again, in Section VI., water of salinity less than 35\5 appears at
the surface (Stations E12 and E13) to the north of the shallow area
which extends westwards to the Porcupine Bank.

The general situation would seem to be that after the month of
May there was a decided movement of salt water — salinity about
35’6 per mille — towards the west coasts of Ireland and Scotland, and
that this water banked itself up and flowed partly downwards (note the
isohalines of 35‘3 and 35’2 in Section VI.) and partly northwards into
the Faeroe- Shetland Channel. At the date of the observations the
northward movement had almost ceased, and water from the Nor-
wegian sea was making its way southward along the eastern side of
the Faeroe- Shetland Channel. It can be traced from north to south
as follows :

International Faeroe-Shetland, Section II., Stations Sc. 14a and Sc. 13a.

,, ,, Section I., Station Sc. 19b.

Silver Belle , Section III., Stations Fl and F2.

,, ,, V., Station Eld.

,, „ VI., Stations El 2 and El 3.

Some importance may be attached to the increased steepness of
the gradients of temperature and of salinity off the Continental shelf
at a depth of about 700 to 800 fathoms. If we compare the salinities
at Station E5, 1903, with Stations 2 and 5, 1904, it is noticeable that

104 Hydrographical Observations, Xorth Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

a similar feature occurs, although less well marked. A salinity of
35*3 per mille occurs in both cases at a depth of about 850 fathoms,
and this would seem to indicate the limit in depth of the surface
system of movements. The point is well worth further observation.
At depths greater than about 900 fathoms salinity seems to change
very little with depth — at least, down to 2,000 fathoms ; the lowest
salinity in the 1904 Section I. was 35‘21 in 1,600 fathoms. But north
of the Porcupine Bank (Section VI., 1903) the salinity falls suddenly
to 35'2 at about 800 fathoms, and then slowly to 35-08 in 1,500 fathoms.

The observations of the Silver Belle in 1903 afford definite infor-
mation about the extension southward of water coming’ from the
Norwegian sea over the Wyville- Thomson ridge. The occurrence of
these southward movements may now be regarded as proved, and it
seems that they take place pretty frequently, if not every year. The
question of the cause of these changes is one that can best be dis-
cussed after the observations of the International Council have been
kept up for some time longer, but the work of the Silver Belle in
depths beyond 700 fathoms seems to support the hypothesis that we
are here dealing with stream currents set up by the banking of drift
water against a mass of land, in the same way as the Equatorial
currents give rise to the Gulf Stream.

1904. — The outstanding features of Section I. — Ireland to the
Azores — are easily described. Temperature and salinity increase at
the surface from north to south ; vertically they diminish together till
the isothermal of 4° and the isohaline of 35'3 are reached at depths
varying; from 850 to 1,000 fathoms. At these values the lines are
practically horizontal, and beyond 1,000 fathoms the fall of tempera-
ture and salinity is extremely slow. Whether the view that these
iso-surfaces represent the lower boundary of the surface circulation
be accepted or not, it is, I think, evident that they indicate a critical
level of some kind, and that they are practically horizontal along the
line under consideration.

The distribution of temperature shows few irregularities, the chief
being a ‘ hump ’ of relatively cold water at Stations 6 and 7 between

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 105

300 and 800 fathoms. Salinities show a remarkably large volume of
water between 35b and 35-8 per mille down to 500 fathoms from the
Irish coast to Station 8. It would seem that the increased surface
salinity as the Azores are approached is due to increased evaporation,
and the general impression conveyed by the temperature and salinity
sections together is that the line is nearly perpendicular to the direc-
tion in which the water is moving, if it is moving at all.

The main question raised by the remaining sections is that of the
effect of the extremely saline water flowing out of the Mediterranean
through the Straits of Gibraltar. The effective width of the strait
may he taken as about 7b miles, and depth about 200 fathoms.

Below the level of the ‘ sill ’ the temperature on the Mediterranean
side (Stations 43 and 44) is uniformly 12*5°, and the salinity 38b.
The plane of separation of the inflowing and outflowing waters lies at
a depth of between 50 and 100 fathoms at Station 44, and in the strait
itself (Stations 42 and 45) between 100 and 150 fathoms, apparently
nearer the first figure. Thus we have an outflowing stream some
70 fathoms thick and 7 miles across, consisting of water which at this
season is of practically the same temperature as the water outside in
the Atlantic, and 2 to 3 per mille salter than it.

It is clear that the outflowing water at first streams over the ridge
and falls down, mixing rapidly with the fresher waters, until it begins
to reach the layers of equal density in the lower temperatures below.
This apparently happens at a depth of about 600 fathoms, and from
this level the horizontal movements are more extensive than the
vertical. At the time these observations were made it would seem
that the influence of Mediterranean water was inappreciable west of
about Long. 22° W. and below 1,300 fathoms. Northwards the effect
is still apparent at Station 53, where there is a remarkable stratum of
water, salter and heavier than the water above and below it, between
1,000 and 1,200 fathoms. This is the only ‘inversion’ of specific
gravity which occurs in these observations, and it does not seem easy
to account for it. It is certainly a temporary phenomenon. Its
occurrence so far north, and so close to the land, is rather unexpected,

14

106 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

and suggests tliat periodic and irregular variations of wide extent
probably occur in this coastal belt.

TABLE I.

Positions of Stations, 1903.

N.

W.

N.

W.

Station El

51° 56'

11° 24'

Station El 5

55° 47'

12° 28'

„ E2

51° 46'

12° 16'

„ E16 ...

55° 43'

10° 12'

„ E5

51° 00'

12° 00'

„ FI ...

58° 24'

8° 30'

„ E7

51° 30'

12° 00'

„ F2 ...

58° 45'

8° 35'

„ E8

52° 00'

12° 00'

„ F3 ...

59° 18'

8° 30'

„ E9

52° 30'

12° 00'

„ F4 ...

59° 50'

8° 42'

„ E10 ...

53° 00'

11° 57'

F5 ...

60° 29'

9° 30'

„ Ell ...

53° 30'

12° 00'

„ F6 ...

60° 41'

8° 50'

„ El 2

54° 00'

12° 00'

„ F7 ...

61° 01'

7° 42'

„ E13

54° 30'

12° 00'

„ F8 ...

60° 30'

7° 47'

„ E14 ...

54° 45'

12° 00'

„ F9 ...

60° 01'

6° 04'

III.— HYDROGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS MADE IN 1905.

The observations made to the west of Gibraltar during 1904 having
established the fact that a regular survey of the region in connection
with the international observations was of the first importance,
Dr. Wolfenden sent the Silver Belle over part of the area at the end
of 1905. Soundings were made at eleven stations, beginning near
Station E l of the international series, off Ushant, on November 8, and
ending in the Strait of Gibraltar on December 20. The line closely
follows Section III. of' 1904 as far south as Station 51, and then runs
south-westward to Madeira, repeating the line of Section II., 1904, to
the Strait. From the remarks in Captain Henry’s log, it appears that
the work was carried out under great difficulties, and its successful
achievement is a remarkable example of endurance and skill.

The total number of temperatures and samples obtained was
seventy-six. The chlorines have been determined by Mr. Manley,
and all the observations treated in precisely the same way as in the
previous years. The results will be found in Table V.

Sections I. and II., 1905, show the distribution of temperature and
salinity disclosed. Section I. is, in its northern part, comparable with
Section III. of 1904, as has already been stated, and we have now the
advantage of a section showing salinity as well as temperature.
Section II. is, of course, comparable with the Section II. of 1904.

The general type of distribution is the same in both years, and
there seems little reason to suppose that the type is not constant, with
a wide range of variations. There is, therefore, little to be gained by
further detailed discussion of the two years’ observations, as they do
not supply sufficient material to enable us to ascertain the full extent
of the variations, and how far they are periodic or irregular.

A few points may, however, be noticed.

In 1905, notwithstanding a much lower surface temperature (prob-
ably chiefly due to difference of season), a larger body of relatively
warm water occurred at intermediate depths off the Bay of Biscay than

107 14 — 2

108

Observations made in 1905

in 1904 (compare Stations 2 and 3, 1905, with Stations 56 and 58,
1904). Again, the salinity of Section I. indicates that the Mediterranean
water, represented by the layer of maximum salinity at a depth of
about 600 fathoms, had moved mostly northwards, forming a stratum
of over 36 per mille about 500 fathoms thick at Station 5, and over
400 fathoms thick at Station 3, but thinning to about 100 fathoms at
Station 4, off the coast of Spain. The thinning at Station 4 may be
due to downward movement from the surface of water drifted against
the land.

I he supposition that the movement of Mediterranean water was
more northerly during or just before the second series of observations
than in the first, is confirmed by a comparison of the sections east-
ward from Madeira to Gibraltar. Taking the isohaline of 36 per
mille again, Ave find its western extension at Station 34 in 1904 and
Station 6 in 1905, a difference of about 140 miles ; the layer of Avater
over 36 is thinner, and the layer under 36 being correspondingly
thicker.

We may, therefore, conclude that at different dates the extension
of water from the Mediterranean varies very considerably northwards
and westwards, and possibly also southwards, though as to this we are
as yet without information. Whether the variations are periodic or
irregular, or (as seems likely) both, we do not know. The causes of
these variations must necessarily be extremely complex, as they are
probably due partly to far-reaching changes in the movements of the
Atlantic waters, and partly also, though in a less degree, to fluctuations
in the volume and salinity of the water pouring out of the Mediter-
ranean. It seems certain that the northward movement of the
Mediterranean water may extend at least as far as the entrance to the
English Channel, and it is obviously of the first importance to
determine how often, and under what conditions, this takes place.
The conditions which give rise to the formation of Rennell’s Current
may induce something of the nature of upwelling of Avaters west and
south-west of ITshant, and such upwelling might bring Mediterranean
water to the surface and into the Channel.

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 109

TABLE II.

Observations, 1903.

No. of
Sample.

Date.

Position.

Def

Path.

th.

Metres.

Temp.
° C.

Cl.

P.

<T<.

1

June 11

Station El ...

0

0

15-0

19 73

35-64

26-48

2

60

110

10-5

19-70

35-59

27-34

3

130

238

10-2

19-71

35-61

27-41

4

12

Station E2 ...

0

0

12-8

19-73

35-64

26-95

5

,,

100

183

10-5

19-67

35-53

27-30

6

200

366

10-4

19-68

35-55

27-33

7

300

549

10-2

19-69

35-57

27-38

8

f : ■ • •

400

732

10-0

19-71

35 61

27-45

9

500

914

8-4

19-73

35-64

27-74

10

25

Station E5 ...

0

0

14-5

19-73

35-64

26-60

11

55

,,

100

183

10-8

19-73

35-64

27-33

12

200

366

10-6

19-71

35-61

27-34

13

300

549

10-3

19-72

35-62

27-41

14

400

732

10-0

19-72

35-62

27-46

15

500

914

9-4

19-74

35 66

27-59

16

ff

51 ...

600

1,097

8-6

19 78

35-73

27-78

17

,,

55 • • •

700

1,280

7-6

19-70

35-59

27-82

18

ff

5 f

800

1,463

5-8

19-56

35-34

27-87

19

ff

55 * * •

900

1,646

4-8

19-49

35-21

27-89

20

July

7

Station E7 ...

0

o

14-3

19-67

35-53

26-57

21

ff

300

549

10-0

19-68

35-55

27-40

22

ff

55

600

1,097

8-0

19-68

35-55

27-73

23

ff

8

Station E8 ...

0

0

14-5

19-74

35-66

26-61

24

ff

ff

150

274

10-5

19-69

35-57

27-33

25

ff

ff

250

457

10-3

19-69

35-57

27-37

26

ff

Station E9 ...

0

0

14-9

19-73

35-64

26-51

27

,,

55 • • ■

60

110

10-6

19-72

35-62

27-35

28

ff

120

220

10-4

19-70

35-59

27-36

29

ff

Station E10 ...

0

0

14-6

19-73

35-64

26-57

30

ff

55 * * ‘

50

91

10-6

19-73

35-64

27-36

31

ff

55

95

174

10-0

19-69

35-57

27-42

32

Station Ell ...

0

0

14-0

19-70

35-59

26-66

33

ff

55

70

128

10-2

19-70

35-59

27-39

34

„

55 * * *

145

265

10-0

19-71

35-61

27-45

35

ff

9

Station El 2 ...

0

0

13-5

19-63

35-46

26-67

36

„

55 ‘ ‘

100

183

9-6

19-68

35-55

27-47

37

ff

55

200

366

9-4

19-66

35-52

27-47

38

ff

11

Station El 3 ...

0

0

13-3

19-64

35-48

26-72

39

ff

55

100

183

9-8

19-68

35-55

27-43

40

ff

55 * * *

200

366

9-5

19-62

35-44

27-40

41

5)

55 ‘ *

300

549

9-3

19-61

35-43

27-42

42

>5

55 ■ • •

400

732

9-0

19-61

35-43

27-47

43

ff

51 • • •

500

914

8-2

19-63

35-46

27-63

44

ff

55

600

1,097

7 -5

19-62

35-44

27-71

45

ff

55

700

1,280

6-0

19-63

35-46

27-94

46

ff

ff

800

1,443

5-3

—

—

—

110 II ij dr o graphical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

Table II. — Observations, 1903 ( continued ).

No. of
Sample.

Date.

Position.

Depth.

Temp.
° C.

Cl.

P.

o-,.

Fatli.

Metres.

47

July 11

Station El 3 ...

900

1,646

4-3

19-52

35-26

27-99

48

55 • • •

1,000

1,829

3-7

19-43

35-10

27-94

49

1,100

2,012

3-6

—

—

—

50

1,300

2,377

3T

1943

35-10

27-98

51

1,500

2,743

3-1

19-42

35-08

27-96

52

„ 13

Station Ell ...

0

0

13-0

19-67

35-53

26-83

53

100

183

—

19-64

35-48

«

54

200

366

9-4

19-63

35-46

27-43

55

300

549

9-2

19-64

35-48

27-48

56

400

732

8-7

19-64

35-48

28-57

57

500

914

8-2

19-63

35-46

27-63

58

600

1,097

7-0

19-64

35-48

27-81

59

700

1,280

5-6

19-58

35-37

27-92

60

800

1,463

5-0

19-48

35-19

27-85

61

900

1,646

41

19-46

35-16

27-92

62

1,000

1,829

3-8

—

—

—

63

1,100

2,012

3-6

19-45

35-14

27-96

64

1,300

2,377

3-2

—

—

—

65

1,500

2,743

3-0

19-46

35-16

28-03

1,577

2,884

2-8

—

—

—

66

„ 16

Station El 5

(chalky ooze)

0

0

13-7

19-66

35-52

26-66

67

100

183

9-5

19-66

35-52

27-46

68

200

366

9-3

19-63

35-46

27-46

69

300

549

8-6

19-63

35-46

27-56

70

400

732

8-1

19-62

35-44

27-63

71

500

914

7-8

19-58

35-37

27-63

72

600

1,097

7-0

19-56

35-34

27-71

73

700

1,280

6-0

19-50

35-26

27-78

74

800

1,463

5-0

19-44

35-12

27-79

75

900

1,646

4-2

19-44

35-12

27-88

76

1,000

1,829

3-8

19-43

35-10

27-91

77

1,100

2,012

3-6

19-42

35-08

27-91

78

1,300

2,377

3-2

19-42

35-08

27-95

79

1,500

2,743

3-0

19-42

35-08

27-97

1,561

2,854

2-8

—

—

- — ■

80

„ 19

Station El 6

(chalky ooze

bottom)

0

0

13-5

19-60

35-41

26-63

81

100

183

9-5

19-66

35-52

27-46

82

200

366

9-3

19-64

35-48

27-46

83

300

549

8-6

19-62

35-44

27-54

84

400

732

8T

19-61

35-43

27-61

85

500

914

7-2

19-57

35-35

27-68

86

600

1,097

6-3

19-56

35-34

27-80

87

700

1,280

5-6

19-46

35-16

27-75

88

800

1,463

5-0

19-44

35-12

27-79

89

900

1,646

4-2

19-43

35-10

27-87

90

))

5 5 5 5 * * *

1,000

1,829

36

19-41

35-07

27-90

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 111

Table II.— Observations, 1903 ( continued ).

No. of
Sample.

Date.

Position.

Depth.

Temp.
0 C.

Cl.

P.

(T(.

Fath.

Metres.

91

July 19

Station El 6 ...

1,100

2,012

3 4

19-41

35-07

27-92

92

1,300

2,377

3-0

19-40

35-05

27-94

93

Aug.

4

Station FI. ...

0

0

13-3

19-59

35-39

26-65

94

100

183

9-2

19-60

35-41

27-43

95

5

Station F II. . . .

0

0

13-3

19-60

35-41

26-67

96

100

183

9-4

19-66

35-52

27-47

97

200

366

9-2

19-66

35-52

27-51

98

300

549

8-6

19-66

35-52

27-61

99

6

Station F III.

0

0

12-9

19-63

35-46

26-79

100

11

51

100

183

9-2

19-63

35-46

27-47

101

11

ii . . .

200

366

8-6

19 63

35-46

27-57

102

ii

11

300

549

8-4

19-63

35-46

27-60

103

11

11 • • •

400

732

8 2

19-63

35-46

27-63

104

51

11

500

914

8-0

19-63

35-46

27-66

105

11

11 • • •

600

1,097

7-0

19-63

35-46

27-80

106

5)

700

1,280

5-8

19-59

35-39

27-91

107

11

800

1,463

4-4

19-58

35-37

28-07

108

1)

7

Station F IY.

0

0

12-7

19-66

35-52

26-87

109

11

11 • • •

100

183

9-0

19-66

35-52

27-54

110

„

200

366

8’6

19-63

35-46

27-57

111

11

300

549

8-4

19-63

35-46

27-60

112

11

51 • • •

400

732

8-2

19-63

35-46

27-63

113

11

11 • • •

500

914

7-9

19-63

35-46

27-67

114

11

11 • • •

600

1,097

6-8

19-63

35-46

27-83

115

11

11

700

1,280

5-6

19-63

35-46

27-99

116

11

8

Station F V. ...

0

0

11-0

19-65

35-50

27-18

117

11

11 • • •

100

183

8-3

19-64

35-48

27-62

118

11

11

185

339

8-0

19-60

35-41

27-62

119

9

Station F VI.

0

0

10-0

19-63

35-46

27-33

120

11

11

35

64

9-6

19-63

35-46

27-40

121

11

11 • • •

65

119

9-0

19-63

35-46

27-50

122

11

13

Station F VII.

0

0

10-7

19-60

35-41

27-16

123

11

li • • •

100

183

8 J

19-60

35-41

27-61

124

11

il • • •

200

360

6-6

19-60

35-41

27-82

125

11

ii . . .

300

549

2-4

19-48

35-19

28-12

126

11

11 • • •

450

823

0

19-45

35-14

28-24

127

11

14

Station F VII r.

0

0

11-4

19-63

35-46

27-07

128

11

11 ■ • •

100

183

8-6

19-63

35-46

27-56

129

11

11

200

366

8-1

19-56

35-34

27-55

130

,,

11 • • •

300

549

5-3

19-53

35-28

27-88

131

11

11 • • •

400

732

1-0

19-41

35-07

28-12

132

,,

51 * • *

500

914

0-8

19-39

35-03

28-19

133

11

17

Station F IX.

0

0

11-6

19-72

35-62

27-17

134

11

11 • ■ •

100

183

9-4

19-66

35-52

27-47

135

,,

11 ’ • •

200

366

8-8

19-66

35-52

27-57

136

15

11 • • •

300

549

4-3

19-63

35-46

28-15

137

11

11

400

732

0-5

19-41

35-07

28-20

138

51

15 * * •

500

914

0-5

19-41

35-07

28-20

139

11

”

590

1,079

1-0

19-40

35-05

28-21

TABLE III.— Observations, 1904.

112 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

6 8

.OOCDOON^p^NO

P<N<N<NHOC500<00

OlNOiO^COCCC^OOOiO

ONHOOOiacON^^M

CO *0 00 *0 H r— I O H (N lO CO 00 lO
00(N000005C500 COfNOO

OOHCOO(Nt^COC5
H 05 GO O CO 05 O O
H CO t''* OHO

0<DHM<0 05C3NO<005 10
HO5C0<DH<NO500H<NO5
H CO ‘O CO O <N <D CO H

0<DHM©05(N^N O <0 r— i CO

HO500<OHCOHO5 H 05 CO

H CO lO N 05 o H

OOOOOOOOOO
<N*0 00000*0
H (N ^ CO 00 00

O *0 0000000000
<N*0000*000000
HdCO^CONOOlN

0*00000000 0*000

<N *0 000000 <N *0 O

h <N CO ^ u*. (D H

O o

Q*

o

O

Long,

gentle

swell.

|

Rough.

Rather

rough.

Clear.

Fine,

Clear,

cloudy

sky.

Overcast
sky and
heavy
rain. :

N.W. by
W.

Light,

variable.

S., fresh.

W. to
S.W.,
fresh.

£

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 113

O O <M T* CO O CO

Ttl Tp N 05 O O rH

t'- x^ x» r>- oo oo co

(M (N N Ol Cl CM CM

CO O N H O (3 ^

<p Tji !>. O O

CO N CO CO

CM CM CM CM CM CM CM

N O N N 00 HCO

!>• I — X>- O CM (M CM

io io >n io if, o o

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO

X^ N K W Cl H id

x>.

O 1C O 1C 1C iO lO

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO

Cj 05 05 05 05

05 05 05 05 05 05

onco a

m co x>* oo 05

T^OCOOO O^CMNOCOCOO iO O >Q O (3 ^ >0 ^ Cl lO H ^WWCOhNOOOTOh COidOOCOClOOCO

O O CO CO ^ i — I O Oj CO CO CO CO ^C0HOO05C0C0^C0C0 iiiMOOOCOMO^CO ^MHHOOOliQCO

O d N CO 05
CO CO 05 CO CM
CO X''- O ^ CO

CO 05 ■wfl O 05 CM O r— l OOHWOd^OO^CO OOHCOCOCl^OOlCO O CO H CO CO CM X^- CO ^

CO ^ H CO Cl H O N ^05 00COCCrHCO'3'05^ -^O5C0COC0r— (COCM^f ^05C0C0C0O^05

HiQO5CMO0QiO00 pHCOX^CidCO-HX^ H CC X^ 05 d CO x^ H CO X^ O CO H

ri H CM d CM

H H CM CM

HHd

H H CM

O O O O O
O O O O O
CM CO OO O

oooooooo

OOOOOOOI-

HCOiOI^On^iC

OOOOOOOOOOO

CMOOOOOOOOO

Hd^ON05diO

OO OOOOOOOO
CM OOOOOOOO
H d ^ O O O

o OOOOOOOO
CMOOOOOOO
ri CM r* CO 05 CM

o

o

o

o

cb

O

rH

rH

r—H

h S

^ co o

'ri •"IS ^

Long
irregul
well fr
W.

Rathe
rough
ng sw
rom A

Rougl

CO

>>

S-<

•

3 >5
O

05

05 •

• — i 05

« S

r-i CO

o

hi

m

&

wS 8

gq

C/5 05

W

tH

05 d p

3

15

114- Hydrographical Observations , North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

s s

C5 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

• O O lO I

no O Ol N OO O W CM
'ooaco^^coco

r-H 0-1 T* CO 05 <p oi
i O 05 CO i1 CO CO CO

oo vo o h o cp o o ^

iobcOtNHOOOO^COW

O CO — I CO CO O J 1^ CO 05 ^ CO

^ 05 00 COCOH05CD(M05tJ(
I- M N 05 O ^ CO H N

> HC0 05 THOC0INNC0

05C0T«HC0^HNT}i

H iO 05 Ol CO O W N

OC0HC0C0r-NW05^C0
riiO5COCOC0O5CO(NO5^
H CO N O ^ CO ^ N

0^00000000000

(MuOOOOOOOOOO

HOI^IOCOCCOOUO

oooooooooo

40 00000000
T— I M lO N 05 rl M W

040000000000
0140 00000000
rH (N CO CO O (M 40

Sa

o

OS

CQ

&

o

H

<1

>

Oh

w

U1

CO

o

£ g

<3J

> ,j
O c/3
P*5. O

id

<35

O

o M

W

P5

<

H

03

+3 W
ajo

3

w-g

03 £

3d -

.gpg

's Q

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 115

OON
CO Ol

OTjUOCOCOO'^'^iO(MOtpCpOinHOOOCON

rHHOOCOI^OlO^^COCOCOCOCOCOCOMCOCKN

oi vo © vp

CO ^ CO fH

Ol cp Ci cp Oi
05 O CO CO w

OO GO O ^ ■
CO CO CO (N I

I OO 00 CO CO
i O. CO CO

CO rH
CO CO

OOHNCOCOOH’#
niOCOOOCO^COH
H H CO O N 03

NOCOlOOOliONOCO
O' CO CO rp oi H 03 N O ^
O (M ^ CO CO O H CO LO N
r-T rH H rH rH of of of of Cl

0 03 OJ lO CO OCDH

(M O 03 MO -^05

01 H OW CO
of CO CO CO* CO

CO Cl N 03 O CO o CO

co co a ci 03 ^

h N o CO H N
H r-T of of

HCOCOHOOIOCOO
C3 00OC0C0H<03^Cl
H CO N C l CO r— t I '- cr.

r-T rH of of of

OVOOVOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OlvOl-'OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
H(MC0^inCDNQ003OH(MC0^lOC0NC003O
r—T r-T r-T r-T r-T H r-T r-T rH rH of

o»r. ooooooo

OIVOOOOOOO
H ^ CO O CKO

ooooooooooo

OJVOOOOOOOOO
rH (N ^ K 03 CKO CO

^ bO . .

o3 <o U

' o

02

: W W

bfj^

3

co

o

O!

0

01
Ol

o

o

k;

3

oo

o

o

15

116 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

u &
o 2

• OOCOXONWO^OiO

O O CM O O .

■ t^COCMCMOOOuOt^COCO CO O CO CO i

lOOi^^COCO

99^0)'

OOIQWIN.

I t-\ VO !>. O CO
I Oi O ^ CO CO CO

OCOr-iCO'XJHNCOCJOCO
^OCOCOCOOCOCMO^
pi CO N O ^ CO H

OOHMOH^OOiOCO O CO H CO Ol ^ O CO Ol N CO
^0iC0^C0H®(M03^ TjiOiCO^HOO^HN^

HlONO5(N00HN HUOOJINCOOCON

0*0000000000
CM uOOOOOOOOO
H CM CO CO O CM *0

O *0 000000000
CMIOOOOOOOOO
r-H CO ^ *0 l - O CM »0

*>0 000000000
CM *0 00000000
HCOONOiHCOiO

O

CO

og

U O
.2 '4-*
gw

&

.fa a

as

£

o

H

■<

E>

Cd

Ed

as

w

O

Ed

►J

pq

H

>> .
^ ^

•" d a

3

^ .2 ^
^ O s

os2

w 7J

£

!)□*/

.5 o

^bD a> •

d W

H Jz; '

to

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 117

03 CO CO Ci

O O IN CO

OO N- 1^ 1^

CM <M <M <M -M

CD CO 1C O CO

CO O 03NC0

CD CD »C VO uO

CO CO CO CO CO

CO NODlO

r-t C3C3N N-

o 2 2 2 2

O H N CO ^

O O O O
O0 VO ^ CO

r-H H r* O
CO ^ CO CO

O ? oo 00 Tji C3

03 CD ^ CO W D W

O O O ^ iO iO Cp O (N
C3 vO CO N O N VO iO

COOOr— IrHOO)-^
OOtJICONHCOCO
CM r-H i— I i— I rH r— I

O CO VO 03 H CO ^ K vp
Hl^^cOtNO.

CM r— < i — I r— I i — I

ODHCOC3NOCON
^OCO^ON^O
H ifl O UO N N
r-T r-T (M~ CO

O CD H CO CO N N
03 CO CD CO O
HCONO

O D H CO CD N N CO H
^ 03 CO D CO O D 03
< — l CO O '-f vo

O CD H CO CD D CO H*
03. OO CD <M CD
H CO VO OO OO

O CO H CO D N N» CO 03
■H 03 CO D CO 03 D Cl
r-1 CO I-- O Tfi CO

O >0 0000000 o >o
MvOOOOOOO M

H CO CO O VO OO

OOOOO OVOOOO

VOOOOO NIOOO

HCl^D rH <M

OOOO OVOOOOO
O O O N- <M VO O O O

rji CD CO 00 i — i N CO

O <M O ‘COOOOOOO
VON (MOOOOOOO

^ ^ H Cl ^ CD GO O

d

CO rO

B Sr-.

co

CO

rO

C

O

<D

N

O

o

o

o

o

o

CM

o

CM

CM

<M

O

<M

bC

O

GQ

as

o

a> £

O w

<D

bC .

c >

c/3 ^

[fpg

, — i CD

be

|&=

W

te

bp

3

bo^

ki

vO

CO

CO rH

VO CM

GN

03

CO

OO

CO

«

a3

CD

j>*

9

*o>

CO

CM

o

(M

CM CO

<M CN

118 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

u &
o' g
t r a

rr>

. •# CO o lO in CO O O N o

o

HOvO^(NHO)OtJiMW

Cl O H O >C IQ H 1C lO
H0010^(M00500*#

© © vO (N >

i (M O CO OO VO ■

©..©©. <N

iNlO^HCiOO^COCO CO (N 00 CO

OCDr-COOOj^OOvO©
^OJCOO^HCOTtiOiO
I— i CO vO © <N CO i—< vo

OCHCOOCWNCJ

■^oico'ncoHCico
m co n a o o

©OOCOHCOa^OOlOCO © GO CO r — l
H o CO -t H OO Ol O Ol H T 05

H iC 05 (M CO IQ 05

©ooooooooo©

onooooooooo

H(NMW0NO5Cl^

© vr„ © © © © © © vo
(M VO © © © © © CO
I— l CM VO © GO

©©VO©©©©©©©© ©©VO©

HC]iOOOOOOOO m OJ VO

H OC IG N o T}( CO

Or7j

*3 •

3 ^
3

O G g

^ s

bD

b£.S

G 2

Ph

w

pp

o

o

o

btu

c

pq :

o

aj

o

M

<

E-i

i 60^
G o k^j

H'H ^
-

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 119

CO COkOOCOCOOOOOOi

h o a w ^ od o 9 o o

CD ^ N N ^ CO OO CO CO
CM <M<M<M(M(M<M<M<M(M

^ Oi CO »C O H Tji CO (N CO

t"- ^HawcOCDDlCOD)

CO CD CD O IO to ic ID lO O

CO cococococococococo

^ OOOCOOICOCOIOCO

CO o 05 N OO N ip lO ID

o o o o a a> o o o oi

CM (MCMrHT-Hr-trHT-H^Hr-H

IDCDNCOOJOHCNCO
lO lOiOiOiOiDCOCDCDCD

iO CD CJ O N C5 ^ »c m »D D1 CD N (M N CD CO Tl< HOOO^^HDJOi(»HW NOO^HNriaDHlN^OO

^ Cl O CO iO CO CO 0HCOI^^ClOCOCDrtlCOCO Cl CO iO -t< Cl r-i O 05 CO N O CO CM Oi CD ‘C Cl O O 05 N ^Ji ^

i — I i — I i — I NNHHHHH <M <M rH I r— I i — I i — I i— ) r — I (MOlr-Hp Irlr-tr— IHH

CO CD D1 N CD ID CO O CO CD 1 — I CO CD Cl N CO D. >C O O OO D m COD 05 Cl ^ N CO 05 OCOCDhCODOJCWNCOOCD

CO CD CO 05 -f 05 Cl M ^ 05 CO CD CO a D d 05 D H Tji 05 CO CD CO H O CD Cl H^05C0CD^C0H03CDCDld

I— i CO N O D r- 1 05 r-1 CO N O ”H Gfi h O MC050N050^CO HCOlQN050^lC05

r-T r-T <Df <n~ t-T t-T r-T cm of ih h h r-T i—T c<f of

o o o o o
o o o o o

H d ^ D 05

o o o o
o o

CM CD

lO o o o o
CM 1C o o o
rH (M ^

o o o o o
o o o o o

CD CO O (M ^

OOVCOOOOOOOOO
r— iCMkOOOOOOOOO
r-idCO^OCDCOO

o o >a

i~H CM

ooooooooo

ooooooooo

H Cl CO 'il ID, CD CO CD

p

©

o

kO

kO

»o

(M

CM

CM

f-4 •

o .

'S ^

1

S> c£j. p>-
c3 ^ P>-

g O
Ph f->

W |Sz;

CO

O

<v

S3

co

t>X>rC
*rj co

m 9

fS §

co

CO

CO <£)

J3

CD

O

o

CM

O

o

Ci

&

OO

CM

05-

(M

O

CO

120 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

^KOOCONNNINH^OOOIN

mo)<»o hiocco o oo m

lOiC^NNNNOOOOOOODOO

o a

23 £

• CO vO ©^<NOO<p<pO<N(NO NipOOiOOl^HWON
;W(N0i«Di0MHO050H0^C0 N 03 «0 W (N H O Oi Oi N

COO(NaO(»^iO^(NiCH
• VO ^ W CO

OCO'Or- icocoaoi^ooivoo OCOHCOCOOiOlTfl^CO OCOHCOCOINNCOOJIOOCO

H^0i00©^c0r-00(M05'XI ^a>COCOTtiCOriOl?0 ^OiOOCOCOOiCOiMOitDIN

M CO VO N Oi (M CO H O I— I CO VO N 05 O ^ HCONO^COHvOGl

I r-i rH CQ (M (N

OOvOOOOOOOOOOO
T— ((MVOOOOOOOOOO
H CO Tino N O (N Tjv

OvOOOOOOOOO
(MvOOOOOOOO
H O) CO ^ lO CO OO

OiOOOOOOOOOOO

(MOOOOOOOOOO

o

co

£

o

H

y>

&

w

rjl

PC

o

, ft

£

<3 5

H

>> .

5 g
W)2

t>D .
rS

•p o ©

^ -p ^
Pp C/3 03

PC

o £53

j st
el

H

ij

CQ

<

H

w.

- e<

•“i

bO

S3

<3

to

0

<

o-id .

be

o5fl

33° 45' N,

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 121

MCO^OlOliOHNOCON.

(MCMr-iT-HT-ir-Hr-tr-Hr— I

OOOOOOOiQiptp
^ Cl <M O CO r-D ^ CO (M

rpi CC O ^
i — ( O O CO C£5

h co o a o 05

CO r— I GO rtl CO r— (
(N (M H H i — I i — I

i ^ CD O •© CO iM
lOOOiCOCOiO^

OCCHCOCDOC^^NCOOJ

*#acocD^coHCi?oC'i

HCOkONOlO^CO

OCJOONOHCO^CDNOJO'MCO^NOCOCD

HCO^OiOONCOvO'K^cOlNHacOCD'H

H (N CO 1C <XU^ CO a O Ol CO

OCOCOHCOCOCKM^NOCO

HTllOlOOCOrtiCOHOJOO^)

HCOONOlO^^

O'OOOOOOOOOO OIOOOIOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

(MiOOOOOOOOO H(M(MOOuOOiOOinOiOOOOOO

H(MCO^IO^COO HH(N(MCOCO^rj<iC©NCOC5

OOlOOOOOOOOOO
r-H(NuOOOOOOOOO
H (M CO ^ IT. CD N CC

O -rJH vO

Tjl Oi 4+1

<N (M (M

s

a

Q

, , <v

W

&

a5

a

o

&

so q5

{25

CO

CO

U0

o

oi

o

CO

O

tp

<1

ti)

<5

UO CO 1^

CO CO CO

16

900 ' 1,646
1,000 1,829

1,200 ! 2,195

122 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

O

C*

>

rj-

cc

O

(2

<1

6 a

^5 «S

s

2 O

•s g
< §
H

_ . ^ O (X) H (N (N N N H O O

J'MHCOiO^C'lCOCOiO^COW

O00C0HM«D(NNK)0>inOCD

H^05C0CDC0OCD(M05CDG^

HCONO^OO.HOOl

oo>ooooooooooo
r— ((MiOOOOOOOOOO
T— ( (N ^ CO 00 O CM ^ CO

O O (M CD N Oi 1

l CO co
I © ©

O CO CO r — i CO CO Oi (N ^
r-irtiOJOOCO^cOH
H CO O N O

ooooooooo

i — I CM to O O O O O
H (M CO ^ O

l O IO ^ IC1Q

OQOCOr-iCOCOOJiM^OCO
H^OiOOCO^oOHCOO
H N-W 05 IN T}i

OO >0 00000000
i— fCMiOOOOOOOW
H Dl CO ^ UO N N

cS ©

S

a> ^

2 2

tC ® M

; S

2 S g|2i

GO-3'

T3

T3
S3 •
o> bo
A S3

bo

•73 Sh

F* O

"5

<*.2

bo

be

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 123

ooco^co^wioaiCi

O5099HN^ip!N

4* vo i'-. w i - i-- go

CO (M vo CO O <N

O OD O C O CO

vO CO 05 »0

<M (M CM <M (M <M

CO CO H CO CO O CO
H o 05 (N W ^ CO
N CO CO O O 03 Ol
CM CM CM M CM M M

HCOHHCO(NWWC1

ovo<mcocmcocococo

rjiinN00O3O3Oia3O3
<M M (01 (M <M CM (M <M CM

CM 03 N W O (3 O 1^

CO h OO CM CO H (M M

05 VO CO I ^ 1^* 05 05 05

(M (M CM <M (M (M CM CM

^(MCN-^COO^iOOi
N CO 3 <p 03 3 >0 CM
CO CO CO CO CO »C CO CO

cococococococococo

CM H CO rt< CO rtf

co >omt>oo -rf*

co co co co oo co

CO co CO CO CO CO

00 Tf CO 05 (M H CO
VO CO (M CO X". CO

co k co oo cc co co

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO

vOCOOOCO<M(M(M<M<M
CO lO o oo CD CO CO CO co
COCOCONCOCOCOCOOO

cococococococococo

<M r^OCOOOOON
CO CO H CO CM rt< O

CO CO CO CD CO CO co co

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO

■+NCOCONOCOCO ^
CO 3 r— i O 05 05 O 3 CO

IO N CO H CO CO o o >o O CO CO OO CO 00 CO Tt< CO
3CC HCOCO^ *1< Cl (M a: CO CO CO CO CO H CO

CO O CO rf
(M (M i — i O'

o vo

CO CO

00000505000
3333fhh3 3 3

O O O O rH O

CM CM (M CM (M CM

O O
<M CM

OOOOHHHHHrHr-H O O O O H H H

(M <M (M (M CM (M (M (M CM (M CM (M M CM (M CM (M CM

CO 05 O H 3 CO "t1 O O X'- CO 05 O 1— i (M

00 CO 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 050500 O

Cl CO ^ lO CD

O Ti< <M ^ O O O
m iO ^ CO 3 3
(M (M rH H 1—1 r— ( i— I

CO IO lO O O O

(M CM COOCDO^

. — I i — I 3 3 H H H

O O VO CO 00 O
CO r— i vO VO CO CO

r— ' (Ml — t H i — I H

vO vo vo vo vo O (M OO vo vo vo vo vo VO

<M «M <M iO h iO CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

H H H 3 3 H H H H H n ri H H

CO (M CM (M CO vo vo

CO CO CO CO <M <M

CM H r~ < r— I i— i i— I i—i

O CO H CO ^ CD N 03 vo O CO CO H CO vo OC0CDHC0CD053^
HOSOONOvO^p- 1 H ^ a CO n H ^ 05 CO CO Tf CO H

r — I CM CO ■’"t1 VO CO H CO rH CO VO N 05

O CO H CO co a 3 N O CO
H05 00CDtHCOH05 00CO
H CO vo N 05 O 3

OCOHCOtJCDN
H 05 OO N CD VO
H (M CO HP

OOOOOOOO CO
f— IVOOVOOVOOCO
Hr — l 3 3 CO CO

OOVOOOOOOO
HCMVOOOOOO
H 3 CO XT >o

OOOOOOOO ooo
H VC OOOOOOOO
H3CO^IOCONCO

o o o o o o o
rH VO O vo O vo
H rn 3 CM

i- a
co C
co o

05

a

vs

a

A

o

o

</>

pi

6 <

i

VO

CO

o

CO

rti

vO

vo

(M

VO

rf

O

CO

<M

vO

o

vo

vo

o

vO

co

£

To

vo

VO

CO

O

o

CO

CO

vb

vo

CO

CO

VO

vO

CO

a

ci

co

O H

00 o

Noon to
dark.

G a. in. to
4.30 p.m

CS

co

to

1^.

rH

M

rH

r-1

<M

(M

M

bb

bb

bb

bb

bb

<1

-4

<3

<M

rr

16—2

Table III. — Observations, 1904 ( continued ).

124 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904

CO CO T— I o o o o

oncjn--oooo9 9(N ^o^'onwooiowH

HiO^CO(MHHOCOiO (M^COHr- (r-ir-Hr— IOCOCO

O 04 ^ 4 Ol 4^ Oi 04
(M ^ CO H H O N iO

OCOCOOKM-^N
CO CD CO rH C5
H CO lO N C5 O

OCDHC0CD05IMNC0 05
■^acOCOrfCOOSCDCl
r-i CO N O ^ OO

) H CO CC O) Cl ^ O 05 N CD
05COCDTtfCOr-iCOOU''C4
H CO iO K 05 C4 CO CO 05

i H CO CD C4 N CO 05
05 CO CD CO 05 CD (M
H CO N O ^ CO

o o o o o o o
o o o o o o

H D1 CO ^ 1C CD

OIOOOOOOOOO
OJtOOOOOOOO
H d CO ^ CD CO O

ooooooooooo

mooooooooo

r-iDlCO-^iDNOCOCD

oooooooo

ooooooo

H C4 ^ CD OO O

S2

w K
be o
5 Ch

^ • — : .

.s

w
5 02

.SPa

.SPfe

.SPiz;

-3 o

£

O

be

be

<

be

p

bp

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 arid 1904

125

iQ^HH^tOCJOiOOOOH

O^DNNKNNOOCOCOOCCO

lOCOCOCOCOOHCOOCOCOCD

HOOCOCOOCOCOhMIMW

tOCOtOCMnCDOiOCOCDiOiO

cocococococococococococo

HNNtO«OCOOCDHHW(3

oaoi(»i»05Hi»OHiO'p

00)0105050)003000505

(MHhHHHNHINWHH

OOlGONC'l'N-
<M CO O O O »

0 H N ^ CO CO
HrfiCOHHHO

T* 00 O -rH I
O Ol H H i

( o

< o *o

iC >C CO iO i
O CO CO (M T

I Ci CO CO CO CO CO i — 1
I O O MO Tj( w CO

00 Ol 05 ooo

CHOOO

ob h i

l CO ■yf O CXi
i O O Oi ^

O CO C. ^ O CO (M O
OO T)1 H CO Tf H
H iT. 05 O) CO O
r-T i—H <N

H CO 0 05 (N Tt< o CO
05 CO 0 ^ CO H CO

H CO lO N 05 r-H

0 (M K CO 03 O CO r-H

co co o co ^ cr.

CO ^ o CO

CO 0 Cl N CO 03 O O 0
OO 0 CO 03 0 O 05 0 Cl
H CO N O T)i CO H LO 05
i-T r-T i-T ci" of of

o

0 03 Cl ^

co ^ co 7-i

CO lO 03

Or— ICO0dNCOO3
03 CO 0 CO 03 0 Cl
1-1 CO O ^ CO

ooooooo ooooooo

OOOOOO *000 0 00

H CO O N 03 r-1 H d CO ^ lO

ooooooo

OOOOOO
H d 'C 0 CO O

0*00000000000
CM *0 000000000
i — i Cl ^ 0 CO O Cl ’C* 0

ooooo oooooooo

OOOO- *0000000

dco^0 H Cl ^ 0 00 O

>*£

be

p

c3

o

<0 >
W 55

loudy ;

light

lowers.

1

Misty.

1

Calm
night ;
udden
quail.

O 'm

_ — ; w w
c3

m

H - o

W g>

fi°gasi

W

-f-3 .

w

1__ C/3 <x>
^ P 0

fz; 2

a s

3?

'bp^-

35

3? ”

m ***

35

3 to

35

bp

126 Hydrographical Observations , North Atlantic , 1903 and 1904

. O 0 VO T

Po5(NHi

i CO SO O 05 C5> CO
IOOJNtJICOCO

99coi>19^oo9»onw

05iOHHHOO)«D^COCO

CO CO 91 00 00 ip
00 CM rH O O O O

9009999(^900
WOi— I O O O O

•HCOCD!MNCOC3>OCO

C5CO0COC5O(Na^

HCONO^COHN

0«DmC'3COC1NCOC5vOCO
TfiOJOOCOCOOiCOCNCJ^
H CO N O ^ CO H N

1 H CO CD C5 Cl ^

05 CO CD ^ CO 1 — 1
HC0 1QNO5

OCDHC0CDC1NC005
Tt< 05 X) CD CO 05 CD (M
r-i CO O rti CO

o

ao

pq

O

pq

H

0000000000

10 OOOOOO O' o
H Cl ^ CO CO O Cl vo

o o 000000000
<N >0 00000000
Hd^COCOOCUO

CM

S r

>> ^ SP *

<v :3 .

05 !

H ^ 6

. • T5 ^3

^ C ,

r-G '

OOOOOOO

VO o o o o o
H Cl CO ^ 10

O *0 0000000
CMiOOOOOOO
H Cl CO CO O

O aj

+3 £
m a>

£

£

W Ml®

£ S !

w

w SP

8

. CO

a} p

4|-a

w ■»

£

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1903 and 1904 127

TABLE IV.

Analyses of Gas Sampj.es, 1904.

No. of

Depth in

N2 o.o.

oo

0-> C.C.

(5)

Oo per Cent.
lOOOo

_n2+62-

(6)

COo o.c.
(7)

Temp.

t

(s)

Temp.

T

(9)

Station.

(1)

Fathoms.

(2)

Metres.

(3)

2

1,200

2,195

14-25

5-39

27-47

50-48

° c.
3-5

° C.

1-7

5

100

183

12-53

5-72

31-34

47-93 (?)

11-0

7-8

500

914

12-91

4-35

25-19

49-53

9-2

6-4

700

1,280

13-37

4-95

27-01

49-57

6-7

4-9

1,000

1,829

14-09

5 95

29-69

49-21

4-0

2-3

1,400

2,560

14-48

5-84

28"76

50-38

3-3

IT

1,570

2,871

14-43

5-76

28-52

50-36

3-0

1-3

8

100

183

12-41

5-56

30-94

4811

11-0

8-4

200

366

12-24

554

31-17

48-58

10-6

91

400

732

12-40

4-45

26-40

48-98

10-2

8-4

600

1,097

12-94

4-29 .

24-92

—

9-0

6-2

900

1,646

—

—

49-64

5-0

—

1,200

1,829

[19-79]

[7-37]

[27-14]

50-77 (?)

3-6

—

41

10

18

10-38

4-94

32-23

21-4

18-7

100

183

11-46

4-94

30-12

47-95

14-4

12-5

150

274

11-76

4-78

28-91

51-95 (?)

13-5

11-0

200

366

12-07

4-52

27-26

48-99

12-6

9-7

250

457

11-87

4-46

27-30

49 96

126

10-5

300

549

11-84

4-31

26-70

50-97

12-6

10-6

336

615

11-84

4-01

25-29

52-09

12-5

10-4

43

25

46

4910

15-3

_

50

91

12 06

4-57

27-50

49 94

13-8

9-5

100

183

12-13

4-86

28-59

52-44

13-0

8-9

200

366

11-77

4-00

25-35

51-23 (?)

12-5

10-4

300

549

11-89

4-10

25-64

53-60 (?)

12-5

9-9

400

732

11-74

3-45

22-71

53-63 (?)

12-5

10-4

500

914

—

—

—

54-05 (?)

12-5

—

44

10

18

10-64

4-92

31-62

47-93

21-5

17 0

50

91

—

—

—

48-54

15-0

—

100

183

11-75

4-64

28-28

—

13-2

10-5

200

366

11-82

4-18

26-10

53-65 (?)

12-8

10-2

300

549

11-86

3-99

25-16

53-73

12-5

101

400

732

11-85

3 54

22-98

53-10

12-5

101

600

1,097

11-82

4-72

28-52

53-38

12-5

10-2

700

1,280

12-17

3-85

24-04

—

12-5

8-6

800

1,463

—

—

—

53-29

12-5

—

45

10

18

11-35

5-71

33-49

47-33

16-2

12-9

50

91

11-93

4-94

29-28

48-96 (?)

14-2

10-6

100

183

—

' —

—

52-16 (?)

13-2

—

150

274

11-78

4-21

26-34

52*94

13-0

10-3

200

366

11-80

4-06

25-59

52-90

12-5

10-4

250

457

11-69

5-17

30-67

53-32

12-5

10-5

TABLE V. — Observations, 1905,

128 Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1905

b'

hP rH O

O O H

l'- t'- 1^
(M (N (M

N 05 ^ o CO CO vo
O (M vo CO 05 (N O
1>- 1>- 1^ K W CO N
CM CM 71 CM CM CM CM

a^OHHTUNCO
05 Ol OO CO OO O 05 05
CO 1^ W 1^ 1^ CO 1^ !>.
CMCMCMCMCMCMCMCM

HdCONCMNrHNO
00 CM CM hP 1>» 00 hP 05 <0>
0 N ^ 1^ OO N OO

CMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCM

CO CO O CO vo HP CO
CO O H CO 00 05 O

co w co

CM CM CM CM CM CM CM

PM

CM O <M
CO K O

VO vo vo

CO CO CO

H VO 0 N vo o N

05 N 00 H a N H

vo vo vo CO vo vo vo
CO CO CO CO CO CO CO

CO 1 — 1 vo CO 1 — l vo CM 05
0000NHCOO5C0H
VO >0 vo 0 CO VO VO vo

cocococococococo

OH00CMOCMCM05hP

9<»0(»O0OOHH

CO vo vo vo CO vo vo vo vo

COCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCO

CM vO hP lO 05 N N
hP 05 OO CO hP rH VO
CO VO VO CO CO CO vO
CO CO CO CO CO CO CO

6

' 1972
1976
1972

GO 05 vo CM O CO
OONOOOONtJI
05 05 05 O 05 05 05

HHHIMHHH

CO CM 05 CO O O VO 00
OOOONOHOltO^
05 05 05 O O 05 05 05
rHrHrHCMCMrHrHr-H

COCMVOCOCOCMCOOOVO
05 OO 1>- OO 05 1^» 00 hP hP
05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

rH rH rH rH rH rH rH i — i rH

CO O hP CM O CM 05
H 05 OO H CM O 0
O 05 05 O O O 05
CM rH rH CM CM CM rH

No. of

Sample.

i— 1 CM CO

VO CO N 00 05 O

H Cl CO ^ vo 0 N CO

rH r— ' rH rH rH i— 1 i— 1 r— 1

O5OHCMCOHPVO0N

HCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCM

CO 05 O H CM CO HP
CM CM CO CO CO CO CO

1 Temp.

. CO K O
^ CM IN

CM vo CO VO vo O O
COHOOCOVO^

rH i — 1 i — i i— (

VOOntt^OOCOO

COCMnnHO)^^

rH rH rH rH rH

<»F7P01<»(^vpvoOjC0

HPCMrHOOl^HpCOCO

OO O CO H 0 N 00
0 CO CM CM 1— ( 05 VO

i — 1 rH i — 1 rH rH

Depth in

Fathoms. 1 Metres.

O GO VO

rH CO

O 0 CM N CO OJ VO
CO CO 05 CO CM 05
CO N o CO H

i-T r— T r— T cm'

O CO CO CM 1— CO 05 VO
CO 0 CO 05 0 CM 05
H CO N O CO rH

rH rH rH CM

O CO 0 (M N CO 05 VO H
CO 0 CO 05 CO CM 05 CO
H CO N O Ht CO H iO
rH*' rH*' r-T CM~ CM~

OCO0(NN.COa
OO 0 CO 05 0 CM
rH CO 1^ O HP CO
l — 1 rH rH

o o o

i-i Oi

o o o o o o o
o o o o o o

CM hP CO 00 O CM

rH i— l

OOOOOOOO
o o o o o o o

H CM HP CO CO O CM

ooooooooo

OOOOOOOO

1-hCMhPOOOOCMhP

o o o o o o o
o o o o o o

r-. CM HP CO 00 O

rH

Nature of

Bottom.

j Gravel
and

| shells.

Inter-
I mediate.

Inter-

mediate.

Inter-

mediate.

i

Inter-

mediate.

! Air

i Temp.

. o

O

CM

11-0

9-SI

O

1^.

Sea.

Moderate,
smooth .

Heavy

westerly

swell.

Cross swell.

Long N.E.
swell.

Fairly

smooth.

i Weather.

Fair.

Small

detached

clouds.

Showery.
Wet. Hail.

Fair.

Hazy.

Wind.

^8

."43 ®

^ ^ JH

W r-. 0)

.h N

h, ® 0)

I'H SH p

N.E.,

light

breeze.

rH

.> 03

Longitude.

r^

CO

CO

8° 20' W.

oo

HP

o

O

CM

»>

CO

CO

Latitude.

GO

hP

£

CO

VO

Hp

CM

CO

CO

hP

O

CO

o

HP

CO

vo

co

C>5

P P

d

o

c$ £ d

T3

m

<

<1

<1

Hp

o

CO

1

hH

CM

CM

2

d

>

i

3

O

O

o

o

fc

kl

o .

G tiD

CM

CO

VO

G G

vZ. O •<-«

A m

129

Hydrographical Observations, North Atlantic, 1905

CO r-

^ c. ei ^ oo 05 a o

NOHO(M(MH(NiOO

^CKMlOOJOOHH

CO IM N in CO (N H CO IO
0OIN1QCOO3OOO

(M O Ol Cl CD N CO H CD CD O
CDCOODJiOOl 03 O O iO CO

'D CO ^ O CO
COHOOICI

CD '-C N N N N N OC CD N N N K 00 OO OO CO CD

(M C9 (M CQ D1 DJ (M D1 (NMDl(MC^DlDJtN(N Cl

^ N N N CO 00 OO CO CO K N J'* N CD

Cl Cl d d d d Cl Cl Cl Cl d Cl (M d

CO CD N K CO OO

d d d d ci d

O CO O Cl O O Cl CD
CO H O CO O N CO Ol

OldOrtiCOiOOCOd

comoioodoivoTtico

^ CO CO d CO d D 1C O
NH JlCOOOO^COd

>0 03 oo O CO CD d d O C1 W

1C H O a CO cO CD ~'1 cd no

CD d (M iO N
VO CD -+1 CD CO

co D CD no D no no no
cocococococococo

D D no no ‘O no no nO O
CO cocococococococo

D -o no no D no no no no d D D co no D
cococococococococo CO CO CO CO CO CO

O CD CD CD
CO CO CO CO

CD CD D N CO
CO CO CO CO CO

OCOCOCOCOCOnOd

'fODCODI^nono

h d i-^ th n o m co no

CO r— I CO CO O Ol) CD CD LO

Tt<CODCONCOCONr— I

coococoDco'onono

CO O CO CO D CO cow
d d O O CO rH COd

O ^ N CO Tl<

CO d d rH cc d

OOCIOOIOIDIOI

(d D1 iH i — l i— I rH r— i t— 1

OODOlODOlDOl

ddr-HrHdr-Hr-lr-HrH

OOOlOOlDOIDD

d d rH rH r— I i — 1 rH r— I !— I

OOODlOlO OOOOO
dddr-IrHd ddddd

O O O O .-h

ddddd

iO CD N CO Cl O H d CO^iO'DNCODOH d CO ^ nO CD CO Cl O H (M CO tH iQ CD N CO a O H d CO VO CD

cococococo-H'^-f no no no no no no no no co cd cd cd cd cd cd cd cd cd w w w w w w w

O 9 OO N no O oo
ci no d o ci n no co

vpococpdocpcocp

conodoocono^co

O >0 CD ’-H T. d no CO no

co^oiODcono^co

00 d Hi co Hi

N CD d O O

O O 9 no OvOdOd

W CD -H CO CO CD vO »0 Hi CO

O 00 CD d N CO D no
CO D CO D D Ci Cl
H CO N O ^ CO H

O co ‘D Ol 1^ co Ol no h
CO CD CO CD CD d Oi rO
m co n o ^ co h no

rH rH rH d

rH rH rH d d

C CO CO Ol N « Cl >G H o W CO CD d W O rH CO CD d O W O rH CO

CO CO CO D CO Cl 03 D CO CO 'O CO D Oi CO CO CO rH O OS

hcono^cohio h co n O h co 10 rH d d

H i — T rH d of rH

oooooooo ooooooooo
ooooooo oooooooo

rH d Hi CD CO O d H d -H CD GO O d -H

OOOOOOOOO OOOOOO OOOOO
OOOOOOOO dOOOO VO O O co

r — I d Hi CO CO O d H* H Cl H D r— i d CM

o5

O'

'B

a>

P

- w O

O o

o

r

rH

O S5 J

CD T"

bCo w

-H

o

o

m

P .

P CD

a>

TJ P
P

£ +>
O g

CD

-+H .

WH N

D <D

^ O ^

M H li

^ H N

-EP s

02 "0

M'S

C/2 ^

CO

CO

CO

hH

CO

OO

. o

cd +-*

w d

£

o

6

<D

Q

5^

*6 §

<d a

CD

CO

O

17

IV. — HYDROGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS, SHETLAND

TO NORWAY, 1907.

Station Sc. 6a. — September 1, 1907 (Goldseeker) .

Lat. 60° 4' N., Long. 0° 33' E. Depth of the station, 120 metres.

Metres.

t°

S°loo

ov

Remarks.

115

7-03

35-35

27-72

Time, 1.15 to 2 p.m. Strong wind,

100

7 07

99

27-71

N.W. ; force, 5. Air temperature :

80

7-37

35-30

27-62

dry bulb, 7"0° C. ; wet bulb, 6"9° C.

60

7-58

99

27-59

Hail at 11.30 a.m. Corrected baro-

40

8-32

99

27-48

meter, 767" 1.

30

10-98

35-01

26-81

20

99

34-97

26-78

10

n

34-96

26-76

0

10-85

35-03

. 26-85

^Temperature

n C.

©

o

o

II

Salinity in

%o-

a,— Density in situ referred to pure water of + 4° C.

Station Sc. 7. — August 28, 1907 (Gold seeker).

Lat. 61 06' N., Long. 2° 0L E. Depth of the station, 131 metres.

Metres.

f

S°loo

Remarks.

125

7-19

35-30

27-65

Time, 5.25 to 6.55 p.m. Wind S.S.W. ;

100

7-73

35-28

27-55

force, 2. Air temperature : dry

80

8-00

27-51

bulb, 11 "2° C. ; wet bulb, 9"7° C.

60

8-40

99

27-45

Barometer (corrected), 768 -9.

40

9*22

35-26

27-31

30

10-91

34-88

26-72

20

11-34

34-58

26-41

10

11-50

34-49

26-30

0

11-65

34-38

26-17

130

O <t5

Hydrographical Observations, Shetland to Norway , 1907 131

Station Sc. 8. — August 28, 1907 ( Goldseeker ).

Lat. 61° 30' N , Long. 3° 03' E. Depth of the station, 375 metres.

Metres.

f

s°L

0>

Remarks.

370

5-92

35-12

27-G7

Slight swell. Sunshine. Time, 7.50 a m.

300

5-86

55

27-68

to 12 noon. Wind S.W. ; force, 1.

250

5\84

35 03

27-61

Air temperature : dry bulb, 120° C. ;

200

5-98

55

27-60

wet bulb, 11 "4° C. Barometei

150

55

55

55

(corrected), 768-8.

100

7-82

35-23*

27-50

80

7T8

35 03

27-43

GO

6-58

34-85

27-37

40

7T7

34-65

27-14

30

8-02

34-43

26-85

20

9-G0

33-95

26-22

10

11-12

33-41

25-56

0

11-25

33-40

25-50

125

6-02

35-05*

27-60

* These salinities were redetermined.

Station 1. — September 21, 1907 ( Silver Belle).
Lat. 60° 59' N., Long. Q-47' E.

Fathoms.

i°

-S' °/„„

5

100

35-28

27-19

15

10-0

35-28

27-19

25

100

35-28

27-19

30

9-9

35-32

27-24

40

9-8

35-30

27-24

50

9*2

35-21

27-28

75

8-2

35-28

27-48

Remarks.

Thermometer used : J. Hicks, No.

909,128. Wind N., strong breeze;
heavy swell ; weather showery and
very squally. Time, 7 a.m. to 8.30
a. m.

1 7—2

132 Hydrographical Observations, Shetland to Norway, 1907

Station 6. — September 21, 1907 ( Silver Belle).
Lat. 61° 5' N., Long. 2° O' E.

Fathoms.

t°

$ °/oo

o-/

Remarks.

0

8-8

35-21

27-34

Strong breeze N., heavy swell from

5

96

35-21

27-21

N.N.W. ; weather squally and

10

9-6

35-21

27-21

showery. Time, afternoon, 2 p.m.

20

9 6

35-21

27*21

Air temperature, 6"0° C.

30

9-6

35-21

07-21

At 50 fathoms the observation was

40

96

35-21

27-21

repeated three times, always with the

50

8-3

35-21

27-41

same result.

70

90

35-19

27-29

Station 3. — September 23, 1907 ( Silver Belle).

Lat. 61° 31' N., Long. 3° 4' E. Depth of the station, 210 fathoms.

Fathoms.

t°

S°lo 0

Remarks.

0

9-3

34-87

26-99

Wind variable. Weather, drizzle.

5

9-2

35-01

27-12

Sea very choppy. Nature of bottom,

10

9 0

35-01

27-15

fine sand. Number of thermometer,

20

91

35-30

27-35

106,206. Time, afternoon. Air

30

9-6

35-41

27-36

temperature, 8-0° C.

40

9-1

35-30

27-35

60

91

35-37

27-41

80

8-6

35-30

27-45

100

8-2

35-28

27-48

120

8-2

—

■ — -

140

8-2

35-28

27-48

160

7-2

35-10

27-49

180

6-8

35-03

27-49

200

5-7

35-03

27-64

Hydrographical Observations, Shetland to Norway, 1907 133

Station 4. — September 22, 1907 ( Silver Belle).
Lat. 61° 32' N., Long. 3° 44' E.

Fathoms.

t°

S °/i 00

<T,

Remarks.

0

11-0

32-38

24-75

Weather showery and cold, blowing

5

10-9

32-38

24-77

strong and backing N.W. to W. ;

10

10*9

32-38

24-77

variable, rain later. Time, after-

20

10-8

33-69

25-81

noon. Air temperature, 7"0° C.

30

10-3

34-60

26-61

40

92

35-03

27-13

60

7*2

34-88

27-32

80

7-8

35-16

27-44

100

7-6

3519

27-50

120

7-0

35-14

27-55

140

7-0

35-14

27-55

Station 5. — September 22, 1907 {Silver Belle).
Lat. 61° 15' N., Long. 4° 9' E.

Fathoms.

t°

tf°/oo

Remarks.

0

10-9

32-25

24-68

5

11-2

32-25

24-63

Wind N.N.W. ; light, long swell.

10

11-2

32-25

24-63

Time, morning, 5 a.m. Air tern-

20

11-7

32-47

24-70

perature, 6"5° C.

30

10-0

33-86

2608

40

10-0

34-87

26-87

60

90

35-12

27’23

80

8-2

35-12

27-36

100

79

35-23

27-48

120

6-7

35-01

27-49

140

6-6

3501

27-51

160

6-9

3510

27-53

180

6-2

35-05

27-56

PLANKTON, ‘ SILVER BELLE,’ SEPTEMBER, 1907, SHETLAND TO NORWAY.

Closing-Net.

Station II.

Station

hi.

Station

IV.

Station V.

Arten.

70 Faden.

'd

a

fc

o

200 Faden.

a

a>

'd

£

©

*o

100 Faden.

50 Faden.

•20 Faden.

a

o

'd

o

o

50 Faden.

20 Faden.

190 Faden.

100 Faden.

60 Faden.

20 Faden.

1.

Radiolaria.

Hexacontium entacantliium (Jor-
gensen)

X

2.

Protocystis xiphodon (Haeckel)

—

—

X

X

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

3.

Rhizoplegma boreale (Jorgensen)

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

4.

Bryozoa.

Cyplionautes ...

_

+

+

r

r

5.

Ccelenterata.

Aglantha digitalis (O. F. Muller)) ...

r

Y

6.

Araehnactis albida (M. Sars)

r

r

r

r

7.

Dipliyes truncata (M. Sars) .

_

r

r

r

r

r

8.

Plourobrachia pileus (Flem) ...

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

r

—

—

—

9.

Vermes (sens, gener.).
Annelida larva

r

r

r

r

10.

Sagitta bipunctata (Quoy and Gaim)

r

V

r

r

r

r

r

r

11.

Tomopteris helgolandica (Greef)

12.

Copepoda.
Acartia clausi (Giesbr)

r

r

r

-f

13.

,, longiremis (Lillieb) ...

V

r

-f

14.

Aetideus armatus (Boeck)

15.

Calanus finmarchicus (Gunn)

+

r

+

V

+

+

r

+

+

+

+

r

r

16.

,, hyperboreus (Kroyer)

Centropages typieus (Kroyer)

V

—

r

17.

—

—

—

r

r

r

—

r

18.

Euchaeta norvegica (Boeck) ...

r

r

r

r

r

19.

Gaidius brevispinus (G. O. Sars)

r

—

20.

,, tenuispinus (G. O. Sars)
Metridia longa (Lubbock)

—

r

•

21.

r

r

__

22.

,, lucens (Boeck)

Microcalanus pusillus (G. O. Sars) ...

+

l*

r

r

r

+.

+

+

r

+

r

r

23.

r

+

+

r

24.

Microsetella norvegica (Boeck)

X

X

25.

Oithona plumifera (Baird) ...

r

r

r

r

r

+.

r

26.

,, similis (Claus)

Oncaea mediterranea (Claus)

+

r

r

r

c

c

c

+

c

c

r

+

+

c

27.

28.

Pseudocalanus elongatus (Boeck) ...

r

r

+

+

r

r

c

c

+

c

'+

29.

Rhincalanus nasutus (Giesbr)

r

r

r

30.

Scolecithrix minor (Brady) ...

r

31.

Temora longicornis (0. F. Muller) ...

—

—

—

—

r

r

r

+

+

—

—

c

32.

Crustacea (citer. ).
Conchoecia sp....

r

r

33.

Evadne Normani (Lillieborg)

r

r

34.

Nyctiphanes norvegica (Sars)

r

r

35.

Pagurus (Zoea)

r

36.

Parathemisto oblivia (Kroyer)

37.

Thysanoessa longicaudata (Kroyer) . . .

r

r

r

38.

,, neglecta (Kroyer)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

r

—

—

39.

Mollusca.
Gasteropoda larva

r

+

r

+

+

r

r

+

40.

Lamellibranchiata larva

+

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

41.

Limacina retro versa (Flem.)...

—

—

—

—

—

r

r

42.

Prochordata.
Doliolum tritonis

r

43. Oikopleura sp

—

—

—

—

r

r

—

+

r

r

—

Planktonet viser en avgjort sydlig karakter, kun i de dypeste prover fra Station III. & Station V., tyder
forekomsten av Calcmus hyperboreus & Metridia longa paa en tilblanding av koldt valid (arktisk tilblanding ?).
Former som Rhincalanus nasutus & Araehnactis albicla tyder paa vand av en houre temperatur, likesom fore-
komsten av Oncaea mediterranea Doliolum tritonis paa Station III. & Station II., viser i retning mot, at der
lier er en tilblanding av neget utpraget, varmere atlantisk plankton.

Liggende kryds ( x ) betegner at arten forekom, uten at man kan domme om dens hyppigliet paa grand av
netdukens for grovmaskete konstruktion.

134

Observations, Shetland to Norway, 1907

135

ANMAIKNINGAR.

Snitt. No. 1.

1. Djupen pa stationerna I., IT., IV. 6 V. uttagna ur Nordsjokortet.

2. Skalan enl. Bulletinen, men fordubblad (i enlighet med hoad jag. tick gora

pa Centralbigran i K.).

3. Afstanden mellan stationerna :

I. and II. ... ... ... ... 36'

ii. „ hi. ... ... ... ... 4>r

III. „ IV 19'

IV. „ V ... 21'

V. till land ... ... ... ... 19'

4. Forefaller egendomligt
verkstiillda samma dag, bagge
stationer ai i det naimaste 60'.

all observationerna

pa eftermiddagen.

pa stationerna II. (3 IV. aro
Afstandet mellan dessa bada

Snitt. No. 2.

1. Djupen Sc. 6., Sc. 7 <3 Sc. 8 enligt Nordsjokortet.

2. Samma skala som No. 1.

3. Afstanden mellan stationerna :

Sc. 6 and Sc. 7 .. ... ... ... 54'

Sc. 7 „ Sc. 8 ... ... ... ... 38'

4. Enligt uppgiften skulle S. Foo i ytan pa Sc. 8 vara 31‘35. Della ai viil
felskrifning for 34*35.

137

TEMPERATURE, 1903. SECTION I

SALINITY, 1903. SECTION I.

18

139

TEMPERATURE, 1903. SECTION H.

F4 i2° F9 Scl9A //• Sc I5A

SALINITY, 1903. SECTION n

18—2

TEMPERATURE, 1903. SECTION III .

141

SALINITY, 1903. SECTION m .

143

O

*

145

TEMPERATURE ,1903. SECTION m .

F 7 n° F8 F9

SALINITY, 1903. SECTION EC

F 7 F8 35 5 35 6 F9

19

147

500

moo

isoo_

Fathoms

TEMPERATURE .1903. SECTION V.

19—2

149

SALINITY, 1903. SECTION Y.

E 15 35 5 E 16

TEMPERATURE, 1903. SECTION'S!

151

SALINITY, 1903. SECTION YI.

E 15 EI4355 EI3 EI2 35.5 EII356 EIO E9 E8 35.6 E7 3se E5

153

20

155

to

UJ

cc

o

N

2000
Fat horns

SALINITY, 1904. SECTION I.

157

LO

uJ

TEMPERATURE, 1904. SECTION II

159

SALINITY, 1904 . SECTION II .

161

21

1G3

TEMPERATURE, 1904. SECTION EH .

Stations 59 5 8 57 5 6 55 54 20° 53 51 50 49 48

21

2

Stations 15

165

107

SALINITY, 1904 . SECTION V.

Stations 53 38

TEMPERATURE, 1905,

22

SALINITY, 1905. SECTION I.

CO

22 2

173

TEMPERATURE, 1905. SECTION JL.

SALINITY 1905. SECTION II.

GOLDSEEKER” 1907.

175

nJ

CT)

SECTION N°I

177

S)

23

179

28—2

181

TEMPERATURE OBSERVATIONS

Station 2 "Silver Belle" zi 9 o 7 er s'n. 2- o’e.
Station 7. “Go/dseeker” 2S a oi 6r 6tv z‘ re

SALINITIES AT STATION 7

Station 2 “ Silver Belle" 2/ 9 07. 6r 5'n. o'e

Station 7 “Go/dseeker” za a or 6r 6'/v 2 • i e

150

150

183

TEMPERATURE

OBSERVATIONS

185

Station 3. “Silver Belle” 23 9 07
Station 9. “Go/dseeker” 28 8 07

6T 3 I N. 3‘ 4'E.

61 ' 3*’N 4-E

24

187

Station 3
Station 8
Station 3.

“Silver Belle” Z3 .9 07
“Go! d seeker" 28.8.07.
“ Goldseeker ” 28.8.07

6T 3 I N.
61° 30'N
61° 34-' N.

3°4E.
3° 3'E .
2° + E

24 — 2

SALINITIES AT STATION 8

"Goldseeker" t 9 os 9. oe za a o 7 "Silver Belie" 2/. s 07.

189

V)

<u

-<D

L.

-d)

5

350

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS.

I. — FISHES.

By E. W. L. Holt and L. W. Byrne.

II.— AMPHIPODA AND ISOPODA.
By W. M. Tattersall.

III.— PYEOSOMA.

By G. P. Farran.

I.— FISHES.

By E. W. L. Holt and L. W. Byrne.

1. H imantolophus Riieinhardti, Liitken.

Plates I. and II.

The genus Hirnan to l op h us , Rheinhardt, may be characterized as
follows :

Ceratiidce of stout and somewhat compressed form, with relatively
enormous heads and minute eyes. Spinous dorsal represented by a
single stout, club-like tentacle, folding backwards into a groove, and
bearing at its tip two short digitiform processes and numerous simple
or branching thong-like appendages. Soft dorsal and anal tins, short,
only separated by a short interval from the caudal. Epidermis thick
and rugose, with scattered bony plates, each with a roughly circular
base and short central spine ; similar but smaller plates thickly
scattered over the dorsal tentacle.

This genus was originally founded by Rheinhardt (1837) for the
reception of a fish nearly 2 feet in length, found in 1833, cast up
upon the coast of Greenland after a heavy storm. This specimen had
been partially eaten by gulls and crows, and was half decomposed
before it came into tbe hands of Rheinhardt, who described it as
Himantolophus green landicus. Only the club-like tentacle of this
specimen appears to have been preserved.

A second specimen, 40 centimetres long, was picked up dead,
floating at the surface of the sea off the south coast of Greenland at
the end of 1870, and exhaustively described by Liitken (1878) as the
type of a new species, H. Riieinhardti. This species appeared to differ

195 25—2

196

Fishes

from that described by Rheinhardt (1837) in having a comparatively
deeper body, fewer thong-like appendages to the tentacle, and five rays
in the soft dorsal, and seventeen in the pectoral fin, as against nine and
twelve mentioned by Rheinhardt.

Gill (1878), on the strength of these differences, proposed to refer
Lutken’s species to a separate genus, Corynolophus , but his proposal
has never found any favour outside the United States.

A third specimen, 20 7 centimetres long, was captured off the coast
of the Westman Isles, near Iceland, in 1886, and examined by Liitken
(1887), who identified it as a young example of H. Rlieinhardti.

A fourth specimen, 41 centimetres long, was captured alive in a
trawl in 80 to 90 fathoms of water, fourteen miles from Nazareth on
the west coast of Portugal (a short distance north of the Burlings) in
1892, and was examined and described by Girard (1893). This fish
had lost its tentacle (cut off by the captors) before it came into
Girard’s hands, but was otherwise in good condition, and appears to
have very closely resembled Lutken’s larger example and that next
described. Girard suggested that H. grcenlandicus and II. Rlieinhardti
might well be synonyms for the same species, a question to which we
will revert later.

The fifth known example of this remarkable genus was captured
by the Silver Belle in March, 1906, while trawling in 20 to 25 fathoms
of water close to the east of Gibraltar. This specimen is smaller
than Lutken’s first specimen or Girard’s, but agrees with them in all
essential particulars. It is unfortunately somewhat distorted from
being preserved in too small a receptacle.

The history of the genus may be completed by adding that Liitken
tentatively referred to it some very young specimens taken at the
surface of the South Atlantic ; but the generic identity of these
specimens is open to so much doubt that we leave them out of con-
sideration in discussing the probable habits and habitat of these fishes.

A brief description of the specimen taken by the Silver Belle
follows :

Form stout and somewhat compressed ; greatest depth of body

Fishes

197

some wav in front of pectorals, and (including the loose skin of the
belly, the original contour of which cannot now he ascertained) about
three-quarters of total length, exclusive of mandible and caudal tin ;
depth of caudal peduncle about one-fifth of greatest depth of body.

Head very large and stout ; its length (measured from end of
premaxilla to branchial opening) about five-eighths of total length
(measured as above), and equal to its depth at parietal spines. Eye
minute, about twenty-four times in head, and five times in preorbital
length. Greatest width of head between extremities of jaws, some-
what more than half its length, and about one and a half times the
distance between the parietal spines. Distance between eyes about
one and a half times preorbital length.

Tentacle club-shaped ; length of its stem equal to length of its
longest filament, and about twice distance between parietal spines ;
digitiform processes less than one-fifth of length of stem. Thong-
like filaments, nine in number.

Soft dorsal fin with five rays, originating about four-fifths of the
distance from end of premaxilla to origin of caudal. Anal with
four rays originating six-sevenths of the distance from end of pre-
maxilla to origin of caudal. Pectoral with fourteen rays.

Teeth hinged and of varying size, in two to four regular rows.

Colour uniform black ; membranes of unpaired fins dead white.
Tentacle black, paler at its tip and on basal parts of digitiform pro-
cesses. Upper parts of digitiform processes and thong-like filaments
black, with white tips.

Extreme length, 365 millimetres.

The principal measurements of this specimen are as follows :

Millimetres.

Extreme length (including mandible and caudal fin) ... 365

Length (excluding mandible, but including caudal fin) 347
„ (excluding mandible and caudal fin) ... ... 285

Front of snout to branchial opening ... ... ... 169

origin of dorsal fin ... ... ... 225

" / / c5

,, anal fin ... ... ... 238

198

Fishes

Millimetres.

Greatest depth of body (including loose skin of belly)1 219
Depth of head at parietal spine (exclusive of loose skin

of belly)1 ... ... ... ... ... ... 170

Depth of caudal peduncle ... ... ... ... 45

Length of snout to front of eye .. . ... ... ... 37

Longitudinal diameter of eye ... ... ... ... 7

Width of head at mouth (outside jaws). . . ... ... 92

,, ,, between parietal spines . . . ... ... 63

,, ,, between nostrils... ... ... ... 51

Length of stem of tentacle ... ... . .. ... 124

,, digitiform processes ... ... ... ... 22

,, thong-like appendages . . ... ... 124

The present occurrence serves to materially extend the recorded
horizontal range of H. Rheinhardti , but, unfortunately, adds nothing to
our knowledge of its normal habitat.

The species is only known from isolated specimens taken in coastal
waters or cast up upon the shore at widely scattered localities in the
North-East Atlantic. It is inconceivable that our records could he so
scanty were a lish of so striking and singular an appearance a normal
denizen of shallow water in the East Atlantic.

The well-defined Pediculate family of Ceratiidce , to which Himan-
tolophus belongs, and of which it appears to comprise by far the
largest species at present known, had until lately, by the general con-
sensus of ichthyologists, been regarded, at any rate when adult, as
confined to very deep water, and its members have been termed by
Gunther and other authors following him ‘ Bathybial sea-devils.’

As already stated, Liitken obtained very small specimens of some
Ceratiids from the surface of the South Atlantic, and more recently
Dr. Brauer (1902) has stated that the Valdivia expedition ‘ has shown
with certainty in the case of all Ceratiidce taken that they do not live
on the bottom of the sea, as was hitherto almost generally assumed,

1 These measurements will be found not to correspond with the dimensions
shown in the figure, in which the loose skin is represented in the moderately
distended condition apparently normal in life.

Fishes

199

but are pelagic.’ The exact records of captures of Ceratiids by the
Valdivia are given by Dr. Brauer (1906), and although these records
do not include Himanto lop has, we regard Ids statement as probably
referable to that genus also on account of the anatomical peculiarities
below noted, which Himanto l op has shares with most Ceratiids, and
as being perfectly consistent with all that is certainly known of
the members of this obscure genus. Accordingly, with the greatest
respect for many earlier authors, we are unable to regard Himantolo-
plias as a bathybial form, and prefer to consider it as a pelagic fish
normally living, perhaps not actually at the surface, but at any rate in
the upper strata of the ocean.

Our reasons for advancing this view are briefly as follows :

1. The apparently healthy condition of Dr. Wolfenden’s specimen
when taken in shallow water.

2. The somewhat compressed form, normally - formed pectorals,
and absence of ventrals, which contrast strongly with the depressed
form and geniculated pectorals of the allied but bottom-living
Lophiidce. The loose skin of the abdomen strongly suggests a cor-
relation with a belly capable of being distended with air and acting
as a float, as in some pelagic Antennariidce.

3. The known records, which are perfectly consistent with the
view that we have to deal with a pelagic Atlantic fish occasionally
carried shorewards by the easterly and northerly Atlantic drift.
Such an eastward or northward wandering of a pelagic species of the
Western Atlantic may be paralleled by the record from the Norwegian
coast of a specimen of Antennarius histrio , and by the arrival, on at
least two occasions, of shoals of Lints perciforniis following drifting
timber or wreckage on the Irish coast.

The impossibility of preserving Rheinhardt’s original specimen
makes the task of discussing the question of its specific identity
with the subsequently described specimens difficult. Girard (1893)
seems to have regarded all recorded specimens as referable to the
same species, and there is much to be said in favour of this
view.

200

Fishes

The differences stated to exist between H. groenlandicus and
H. Rheinliardti are briefly as follows :

1. The considerably deeper body in the latter species. To this
we can attach but little importance, as the degree of distension of the
loose skin of the belly is a very material factor, and Rheinhardt’s
specimen was half decomposed.

2. The dorsal tin rays, stated by Rheinhardt to have been nine, and
live in all other examples. Girard points out that the four posterior
bifid rays might well have been reckoned as two each by Rheinhardt in
a damaged specimen.

3. The pectoral rays, stated by Rheinhardt to have been twelve in
his example, and by Liitken and Girard to be seventeen in theirs ; in
Dr. Wolfenden’s specimen the number is thirteen. Even apart from
this recorded range and the bad state of Rheinhardt’s specimen, we are
not inclined to attach much importance to this difference.

4. The number of tentacular appendages — eleven in Rheinhardt’s
specimen, and eight and seven respectively in Liitken’s. Girard’s
example had lost its tentacle ; Dr. Wolfenden’s has nine such appen-
dages. It seems to us that the exact number of these appendages
cannot under the circumstances be regarded as a specific character.

It must be remembered that the reference of all known specimens
to a single species, however probably correct, rests upon inference
alone ; and it seems better to us to retain Liitken’s name for the
specimens with five rays in the soft dorsal, and with a body whose
depth is contained one and a half times or less in its length (with-
out caudal fin or mandible), while confining Rheinhardt’s Ii. groen-
landicus to specimens (should any be found) with nine rays in the soft
dorsal, and with a body whose depth is contained more than twice in
its length.

References.

Brauer (1902), Zool. Anzeig., xxv., No. 668.

Brauer (1906), ‘ Valdivia Deep-Sea Fishes.’

Gill (1878), Proc. U.S. Nat. Mas., 1878, 219.

Girard (1893), Boulet. Socied. Geogr. Lisboa, Ser. 11, No. 9.

Liitken (1878), K. D. Vid. Selslc Slcr., 5th Ser., xi. 320.

Liitken (1887), K. D. Vid. Selslc. Slcr., 6th Ser., iv. 325.

Rheinhardt (1837), K. D. Vid. Selslc. Afliand., 74.

Fishes

*201

2. Squatina Aculeata, Cuvier.

Plate III.

S. aculeata1 (E. Dumeril, MSS., 1804), Cuvier, 4 Le Regne Animal, ’
2nd edit., ii. 394 (1829).

S.Jimbriata,1 Midler and Henle, ‘Plagiostomen,’ 101 and 192 (1839).

Rhina aculeata ,x Aug. Dumeril ‘ Ichtli. Generate,’ i. 465 (1865).

Our friend Mr. C. T. Regan lias suggested to us that a figure
and description of the specimen taken by the Silver Belle might
prove useful, as the species appears to be little known and constantly
confused with the common S. angelus or with Bonaparte’s S. oculata,
and we are unaware of any extant figure beyond the sketch of the
front part of the head given hy Midler and Henle ( loc . cit ., sub. nom.
S. fimbriata).

In this specimen, which is 36*5 centimetres long (excluding lobes
of caudal fin), the greatest breadth across pectorals is contained just
over two and a half times, the greatest breadth across ventrals rather
more than three and a half times, and the length to the anus a little
over twice in the total length. Depth of body at origin of ventrals
four-fifths of its breadth, and at origin of its dorsal five-sixths of its
breadth.

The length of the head to the first gill opening is contained three
times in the length to anus, and about one and a half times in its own
greatest breadth. The snout is very blunt, and the distance from its
anterior point to the level of the spiracles is equal to the distance
between the spiracles or to the interorbital width. The longitudinal
diameter of the eyes is a little greater than their distance from the
level of the anterior point of the snout, and more than one-third of
the interorbital width.

The anterior narial flaps are each divided into two fringed processes,
with a third small and inconspicuous distal process, and the posterior

1 These descriptions appear to refer to the present species only. We can find
no other description in which this species is not confused with either S. angelus or
the S. oculata of Bonaparte.

*26

202

Fishes

narial flaps are divided into a larger proximal and smaller distal
fringed process. From the nostrils a skinny flap extends along the
sides of the head, and is broadened opposite the corners of the mouth
into two rounded processes.

The pectoral and ventral fins have slightly convex anterior margins
very slightly concave outer margins, and are pointed posteriorly. The
claspers are very small. The dorsal fins are subequal in size, and the
lower lobe of the caudal fin is the longer.

The spines on the head are small but sharp ; they form orbital
series of five, the first and last spines of each series being respectively
in front and behind the orbit : two spines occur on each side of the
snout internal to the nostrils. There is a vertebral series of compara-
tively large and sharp back ward ly directed spines — twenty -six between
the pectoral girdle and the first dorsal fin, three and two small lateral
spines between the dorsal fins, and three small spines behind the
second dorsal fin. The dermal covering as a whole is rough, but
without any very conspicuous asperities.

Colour impossible to ascertain, but apparently greenish-grey in
life, with small faint darker spots on the fins and sides of the head and
tail dorsally, and dead white ventrally.

Length, 36’5 centimetres1 (including lower lobe of caudal, 38 centi-
metres). Probably attains a far larger size.

Locality, Mediterranean, off Malaga, 300 fathoms. Previously
recorded from the Mediterranean.

It is probable that the characters of S. aculeata undergo some
change with growth ; but the specimen described above is easily
distinguished from S. angelus of comparable size by the difference in
the dermal armature. The general dorsal surface is much rougher
in S. angeius by reason of the larger size of the asperities, which are
pointed and closely set, while the spines of the head and back are not
very much larger than the surrounding asperities at any period of life.
In a S. angelus of 240 millimetres, presumably new-born, the spines of

1 The specimen is somewhat distorted by careless preservation, and may in life
have been a few millimetres longer or shorter.

Fishes

203

the middle line in front of the first dorsal are more conspicuous than in
older specimens. They are about thirty-six in number, and relatively a
good deal smaller than in S. aculeata of 365 millimetres. In S. angelus
of 375 millimetres these spines are relatively smaller than in the younger
stage, hardly conspicuous, and very much smaller than in our S. aculeata ,
which is of practically the same length. Head spines can be detected
in S. angelus of 240 and 365 millimetres, but grade insensibly into the
surrounding asperities. The nasal flaps are probably variable in both
species, and form no safe guide for distinction. Normally they seem to
be tucked away out of sight. 5. angelus , at 365 millimetres, is somewhat
more massive iu appearance than S. aculeata , and differs a little in
some of its proportions. The width across the pectorals is contained
less than twice, across the ventrals about three and a half times in the
total length ; the length of the head is less by about one-third than
its greatest width, and occupies about one-third of the distance between
snout and anus. The eye is smaller than in S. aculeata,1 its length
being equal to distances separating it from the spiracle and from the
anterior margin of the head directly in front of it, and is only about
one-fourth of the interorbital width. The latter is equal to the distance
from the snout to a line joining the spiracles, but is a little less than
the distance between the spiracles. The hind margins of the pectorals
are broadly rounded in S. angelus , not more or less pointed, as in
S. aculeata.

We are not acquainted with larger specimens of 6’. aculeata.

1 We are not in a position to affirm or deny the specific distinction of
Bonaparte’s S. oculata from S. angelus. The former species is said by him to have
the eye larger than in his S. angelus, from which it does not otherwise appear to
differ in any important respect of which the author took note. It appears to have
lacked both the vertebral spinulation and pointed pectorals of S. aculeata.

26—2

204

Fishes

3. List of Fishes taken by Dr. R, N. Wolfenden in Deep Water
in the Neighbourhood of the Straits of Gibraltar.

We have already discussed the most interesting outcome, ichthyo-
logically, of Dr. R. N. Wolfenden’s early spring cruise in the Silver
Bell in the neighbourhood of the Straits of Gibraltar. The few other

o

fishes captured in shallow water are of no particular interest, but it
seems worth while to put on record those taken in deeper water, as
such a list may be of interest to future workers in the same region.

We have added a few notes on some of the more interesting species,
and for the purposes of this paper have treated the hauls made in the
Atlantic and Mediterranean separately.

A. MEDITERRANEAN.

Four deep-water hauls were made on the Mediterranean side of the
Straits of Gibraltar, as follows :

1 . February 7, 1 906. Off’ Cape Baba, Morocco

2. ,, 9, ,, Off’ Malaga

3. „ 10, „ Off Malaga

4. „ 16, „ Off Marbella

The following species were captured :

ScYLLIIDiE.

- 300 fathoms

- 300 „

280-300 „

- 500

Pristiurus melanostomus , Raf.

SqUATINIDtE.

Squatina aculeata , Cuvier

Raiidye.

Raid oxyrhynchus , L. Bonaparte

Station 2.
Station 2.
Station 2.

Stomiatidje.

Stomias boa , Risso - Stations 1 and 4.

Gonostoma microdon (?), Gthr. - - Station 4.

The specimen is too damaged for certain identification.

SCOPELIILE.

Scopelus glacial is , Rheinhardt -

Station 4.

Fishes

205

The capture of examples of this species, 29 to 39 millimetres long
(without caudal tin), considerably extends its known horizontal range,
which did not previously include the Mediterranean. Although full
records of the temperatures of the strata in which this species has
occurred are not available, its range with regard to latitude appears
to be worthy of remark, and is nearly, if not quite, as wide as that of
the pelagic Schizopod Meganyctiphancs norvegica. The specimens
are damaged, but there seems no doubt of their specific identity.
Fragments of a smaller Scope! us from Station 4 and a badly damaged
specimen from Station 1 are not improbably referable to the same
species.

Macrusidie.

Macrurus coelorhynchus , Bisso -

GaDID/K.

Stations 2 and

O.

Molva elongate/ , Bisso

Station 3.
Station 3.

Stations 3 and 4.

Phycis blennioides , Briinn

CAPROID2E.

Cup r os ape r, L. -

Also taken in shallow water off Malaga, where its vertical range
appears to extend at least from 40 to 300 fathoms. Probably, as
in the English Channel and in the Mediterranean off Marseilles, it
also ranges into soundings of considerably less than 40 fathoms.

Triglidve.

Peristedion cataphr actum , L. - - Station 3.

The two specimens taken appear to be male and female, the former
having the longest filament of the spinous dorsal extending nearly to
the end of the base of the second dorsal, while in the latter it only
reaches the origin of the fifth ray of that fin. The greater conver-
gence of the rostral spatuhe in the male appears to be an individual
rather than a sexual character.

LoPHIIDiE.

Loplnus budegassa , Spinola - - Station 2.

206

Fishes

B. ATLANTIC.

Ten hauls were made in deep water, eight of them off the south
coast of Portugal, and two of them to the west of Cape Spartel :

1.

March 19,

1906.

Off Cape St. Vincent -

300 fathoms

2.

9 9

20,

9 9

Twenty miles south by east of Cape St.

Vincent - - - -

266-280

9 9

3.

99

22,

9 9

Twenty-two miles south-south-east of

Lagos Bay -

379

9 9

4.

9 9

23,

,,

West-south-west of Cape St. Mary

321-360

9 9

5.

9 9

26,

9 9

Eighteen miles south-east half south of

Cape St. Mary

350

6.

9 9

28,

99

Twenty-six miles south-east (or south-east

by south) of Cape St. Mary -

308

9 9

7.

99

29,

9 9

South-east of Cape St. Mary

200

9 9

8.

99

30,

9 9

South-south-east of Cape St. Mary

310

9 9

9.

April

4,

9 9

Forty-six miles west of Cape Spartel

417

9 9

10.

99

5,

99

Thirty-one miles west-south- west of Cape

Spartel -

187-200

99

The following

species were captured :

Squalidte.

Spinas' niger , L. - - - Station 6.

Raiidtf.

Raia clavata , L. - - - - Station 7.

Raia , sp. ----- Station 8.

This is a very small ray, measuring 35 millimetres across the disk,
and 74 millimetres in total length. The umbilical sac, however, has com-
pletely disappeared. The disk is broadly rounded at its lateral edges
and in front. The tip of the rostrum appears as a minute papilla in a
slight resilient depression of the anterior contour. There is a slight
incurvature of the margins opposite the eyes, separating anterior and
lateral prominences of the general outline. The shape of the disk,
therefore, approaches that of Bonaparte’s figure of R. radula,1 but the
latter has the anterior margin more truncate and the lateral margins
less rounded.

1 ‘Icon. Fauna Ital.,’ iii., Pesc.

Fishes

207

Tlie eyes are relatively large, about as long as the width of the
interorbital space, and about two and a half in the preoral length.
There is a spine in front of, and a group of three spines behind, each
eye. On the shoulder region are two spines in the middle line and
one on either side. A median row of spines extends from behind the
shoulder to the tirst dorsal tin. The whole of the dorsal surface of
disk and tail is set with small asperities. The ventral surface is smooth.

The dorsal surface is brown, speckled with larger and smaller
black spots. On the tail such larger spots form several more or less
definite transverse bands. There is a pale spot on each side, just
external to the branchial region and opposite to the anterior spine of
the shoulder region.

The teeth are relatively large, few in number, and obtuse.

The specimen appears from its small size, and from the absence of
any trace of the umbilical sac, to belong to a very small species. Its
characters, however, are too juvenile to be of much good for specific
determination without comparison with a series of older stages.

Narcobatidae.

Torpedo nobiliana , Bonaparte - - Station 10.

CHIMJERIDiE.

Chimcera monstrosa , L. - - - Station 6.

StOMIATI DA'].

Chauliodus Sloani , Bl. and Sch. - Station 1.

An almost perfect specimen, 116 millimetres in length, unfortunately
distorted by careless bottling. There is a thin, colourless epidermis,
similar to that of Stomias , more or less stripped off as a continuous
membrane ; the underlying scales have an opalescent lustre, while the
body pigment is dark brown or black. The dorsal filament extends
nearly to the adipose fin.

AnGUILLIDvE.

Conger vulgaris , Cuvier - - - Station 9.

This record, 417 fathoms, is the deepest of which we are aware
for an adult of this species.

208

Fishes

Macruridae.

Macrurus coelorhynclius, Risso - Stations 2,4 and 9.
M. Ice vis, Lowe - - - Stations 5 and 6.

M. cequalis , Gtlir. - - - Stations 2 and 9.

GADIDiE.

Merluccius vulgaris , Cuvier
Phycis hlennioid.es , Brtinn
Mora mediterranea , Kisso
Gadus argenteus , Guicli -

Station 10.

Station 3.

Station 9.

Stations 5, 6, and 10.

Beryciiae.

Trachichthys mediterraneus , C. and V. - Station 9.

Acroeomatida.

Epigonus ( Pomatomus ) telescopies , Risso - Station 9.

Sea rida.

Dentex macrophthalmus , Bloch - - Station 10.

Pagellus centrodontus , Delaroche - - Station 4.

This observation extends the known vertical range of the common
sea- bream to at least 320 fathoms.

Pleuronectida.

Zeugopterus Bosci , Risso - Stations 3, 6, and 10.

The Zeugopteri taken by the Silver Belle do not all possess the
black spots on the dorsal and anal fins usually found in this species,
but have the shape of Z. Bosci rather than of Z. megastoma. Specimens
from the Bay of Biscay, regarded by one of us as Z. megastoma , had the
shape of shallow-water representatives of that species. In the Irish
deep-water collections the unspotted examples are shaped similarly to
shallow-water Z. megastoma , and the spotted examples show some
distinction in shape from South European Z. Bosci. If the two
species are reallv distinct, their definition requires more care than has
been hitherto bestowed upon it.

So lea prof undicola , Yaill

Station <8.

G. M. Woodward, del

LithAiist v.EA.Fimk&, Leipzig.

i

G M. Woodward del.

Hi in ant

PI. II.

LWi Anst.v E ATujike,le,ipzuj .

G M. Woodward del

S uatir

pun

*6

ItOiAnst. v. EA.Funke.,1 aipzuj.

Fishes

209

ScORPiENIDiE.

Scorpatna dactij loptera , Delaroche - Stations 4, 5, 6, and 9.

S. scrofa , L. - - - - - Station 10.

The larger of the two specimens, 26 0 millimetres in length, belongs
to Lowe’s ear. ohesa.

LOPHIID2E.

Lop/iiits budegassa , Spinola - Stations 5 and 6.

The species is, therefore, not actually confined to the Mediter-
ranean.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Plate I.

Himantoloplius Rheinhardti.

Lateral view - - - - - - - xf.

Plate II.

Himantoloplius Rheinhardti.

Anterior view - - - - - - x f.

Tentacle

Squati na Aculeata -

Plate III.

slightly magnified.

x it.

II. AMPHIPODA AND ISOPODA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS
OF TWO NEW SPECIES.

By W. M. Tatteksall, M.Sc.

During the examination of a small collection of Amphipoda and
Isopoda made by Dr. Wolfenden in the course of various cruises in
the eastern part of the Atlantic, between the Faeroe Islands and the
Azores, the two new species here described were met with. They
are both deep-water forms of great interest, the Amphipod of true
bottom-haunting habits, the Isopod more probably belonging to the
bathypelagic fauna of the ocean.

In addition to these new forms, several interesting species, which,
however, do not call for more than brief notice here, were found in
the collection. Among the Amphipoda may be mentioned a remark-
ably tine specimen of Mimmectes Loveni,1 Bovallius ; two examples of
Lycceopsis Lindbergi ,2 Bovallius, a species not taken again since its
description by Bovallius in 18893 ; Katins obesus ,4 Chevreux, recently
described5 from the collections of the Prince of Monaco, and since
rediscovered in deep water off the west coast of Ireland6 ; and a
magnificent specimen of CEdiceros saginatus ,7 Kroyer, measuring
26 millimetres, a length 6 millimetres in excess of that given for the
species by G. 0. Sars in his work on the ‘ Amphipoda of Norway.’
Among the more noteworthy of the Isopoda maybe noticed Arctureila

1 Lat. 43° 57' N., Long. 10° Iff W., September 8, 1904, open net, 4 fathoms.

2 Lat. 45° 6' N., Long. 18° 14' W , July 29, 1904, open net, 5 fathoms.

3 Bill. K. Svens! c. Vet. A kad. Hand., Bd. 11, No. 16, Stockholm, 1887.

4 Lat. 44° 5' N., Long. 20° 34' W., 1904, surface.

5 Bull. Mus. Ocean. Monaco , No. 35, 1905.

0 Tattersall, ‘ Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest.,’ 1905, iv. (1906).

7 Lat. 59° 18' N., Long. 8° 30' W., 1903, 460 fathoms, closing net.

210

imphipoda and I.sopoda

21 1

dilatata ,1 2 3 4 Cl. O. Sars ; Cirolana Hanseni ,2 Bonnier (both recent additions
to the British and Irish fauna) ; Metamunna typical Tattersall, a
recently described4 form from the west coast of Ireland ; and
Eurycope latiuostris ,5 G. 0. Sars, from two new British localities.

I am greatly indebted to Dr. Wolfenden for entrusting this collec-
tion to my charge, and have much pleasure in associating his name
with one of the new species here described.

Ampiiipoda.

Family, Lysianassidve. Genus , Anonyx, Kroyer.

Anonyx Wolfendeni, sp. non. (Plate IV., Figs. 1-17.)

Locality. — Lat. 39° 53' N., Long. 26° 32' W., 1904. Dredge,
600-700 fathoms.

Body moderately slender and slightly compressed laterally ; com-
bined length of the metasome and urosome slightly greater than that
of the cephalon and mesosome.

Cephalon shorter than the first segment of the mesosome ; rostrum
almost obsolete ; lateral lobes not prominent, the margin of the head
between the bases of the superior and inferior antennas being, in fact,
practically straight.

First segment of the mesosome longer than any of the remainder ;
third, fourth, and fifth segments, subequal in length, slightly shorter
than the second, and a little longer than the subequal sixth and seventh
segments ; coxal plates more or less closely resembling those of the
other species of the genus.

1 Twenty-five miles north-north-west of Butt of Lewis, August 16, 1902, 80
fathoms.

2 Lat. 39° 53' N., Long. 26° 32' W., 1904, 600-700 fathoms, dredge.

3 Twenty -five and forty-five miles north - north - west of Butt of Lewis,
August 16, 1902, 80 and 110 fathoms.

4 ‘Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest.,’ 1904, ii. (1905).

5 Twenty-seven miles north-north-west of Ilona, August 15, 1902, 120 fathoms;
twenty-five miles north-north-west of Butt of Lewis, August 16, 1902, 80 fathoms.

212

Amphipoda and Isopoda

Third segment of the metasome (Plate IV., Fig. 1), with the
posterior lateral angle obtusely rounded.

Eyes apparently quite absent.

Superior antenna (Plate VI., Fig. 3) about equal in length to the
head and the first two segments of the mesosome combined ; peduncle
rather stout, equal in length to the head, first joint longer than the
remaining two taken together ; flagellum nearly three times as long as
the peduncle, composed of thirteen joints — the first joint equal in
length to two-sevenths of the whole flagellum, and bearing two rows
of sensory seta? ; accessory flagellum about half the length of the
main flagellum, composed of six joints, the first of which is slightly
longer than one-third of the whole accessory flagellum. There is a
single rather prominent and strong seta at the lower distal corner of
the first joint of the main flagellum.

Inferior antenna (Plate IV., Fig. 4) extending to about the level
of the tip of the superior, and, therefore, as a whole, somewhat longer
than the latter ; rather slender ; peduncle armed with a few scattered
seta?, and having the fifth joint longer than the fourth ; flagellum
equal in length to the peduncle, composed of seventeen joints.

Epistome (Plate IV., Fig. 2) remarkably prominent, projecting
almost entirely in front of the head (Plate IV., Fig. 2), as a large
compressed, linguiform, rounded lobe, overhanging the anterior lip in
front.

Mandibles (Plate IV., Figs. 5 and 6) robust ; cutting edge with a
single small spine at the internal extremity, and a small tooth at the
other end, otherwise smooth ; molar process well developed ; between
the latter and the cutting edge there is a row of setas, among which are
to be found three or four strong simple spines ; palp elongate and
slender, arising at about the same level as the molar tubercle ; third
joint only half the length of the second, and bearing about fourteen
long simple seta?, while the second joint has about eleven seta3 on the
distal part of its inner margin ; the left mandible bears, in addition,
near to the cutting edge, a short, stout, blunt, and slightly recurved
cylindrical spine.

Ampliipoda and Isopoda

213

First maxillae (Plate IV., Fig. 7) with the inner plate much shorter
than the outer, and armed at its apex with two plumose seta3, the outer
of which is remarkably stout and very densely hirsute ; outer plate
armed at the apex with eleven strong spines, seven of which are longer
and stouter than the rest, and hear numerous small spinules, the remain-
ing four expanding somewhat towards the tip, which hears few rather
coarse teeth ; palp, two-jointed, extending slightly beyond the apex of
the outer plate, the second joint expanding somewhat towards the
extremity, which is armed with eight short, stout, distinctly articulated
spines, in addition to a small tooth at the inner distal corner, its inner
margin, at some distance from the apex, bearing two slender teeth.

Second maxillae (Plate IV., Fig. 8) with both plates rather broad,
the inner rather shorter than the outer, their apices armed with a row
of strong plumose setae and numerous fine hairs.

Maxillipedes (Plate IV., Fig. 9) with the inner lobe very well
developed, quadrangular in shape, its inner margin armed with six long
setae, a single small spine and a few short setae present on its inner
corner ; outer lobe large and expanded, reaching to the distal end of
the second joint of the palp, its inner border finely crenulated through-
out ; palp well developed and rather stout, four-jointed, with numerous
setae on its inner edge.

First gnathopods (Plate IV., Fig. 10) moderately robust and distinctly
subchelate ; basal joint about as long as the remainder of the limb, and
armed with numerous setae on its anterior border ; carpus longer than
the propodus, and somewhat expanded, armed with numerous long
setae on its inner edge ; propodus quadrangular in shape, narrowing-
very slightly towards the nail, the palmar edge slightly and finely
serrated and bearing two long prominent spines on the corner, as well
as a few long setae ; nail longer than the palmar edge, with a small
secondary spine on its inner margin.

Second gnathopods (Plate IV., Fig. 11) longer than the tirst, very
slender ; carpus longer than the propodus ; the latter, with the nail,
forms a minute chelate extremity to the limb ; both propodus and
carpus with the usual fringe of line hairs on both margins, and numerous

214

Amphipoda and Isopoda

long set* on the inner edge only, and also at the extremity of the
propodus.

Third and fourth pairs of legs (Plate IV., Fig. 12) of similar
structure, rather slender ; basal joint about equal in length to the
two succeeding joints combined ; merus longer than either the carpus
or propodus ; latter longer than the carpus ; nail rather more than one
quarter of the length of the propodus ; the whole limbs armed with
numerous long and short set* on their posterior margins, but no
spines.

Seventh pair of legs (Plate IV., Fig. 13) long and slender ; basal
joint greatly expanded, longer than wide, with a row of short slender
spines on its anterior border ; carpus about one and a half times as
long as the merus ; propodus equal in length to, but narrower than,
the carpus ; nail rather more than one-quarter of the length of the
propodus ; the last three joints with a row of slender, short spines,
and numerous set* on their anterior border.

First pair of uropods (Plate IV., Fig. 14) with the peduncle longer
than the subequal rami, and bearing a raised ridge, armed with short
spines.

Second pair of uropods (Plate I V., Fig. 15) having the rami sub-
equal in length to each other and to the peduncle ; the inner ramus
with a marked constriction near the tip.

Third pair of uropods (Plate IV., Fig. 16) with the peduncle shorter
than either ramus ; inner ramus very slightly shorter than the outer,
both edges minutely pectinate, the inner edge with six spines and the
outer edge with four ; outer ramus with a small terminal joint, the
inner edge minutely pectinate, and bearing a row of very short spines,
the outer edge with a single spine at the extremity of the basal joint,
and one about halfway along its length.

Telson (Plate IV., Fig. 17) about one and a half times as long as
broad, deeply cleft for one-half of its length ; the apices of the lobes
of the cleft bear a small spine and two short set* ; there is a single
spine on the dorsal surface of each lobe about the centre of the whole
length of the telson.

Amphipoda and Isopoda

215

Length of the single specimen, a female with incubatory lamellae,
and therefore presumably sexually mature, 9'5 millimetres from the
anterior border of the head to the tip of the telson.

The generic position of this species is at present a matter of some
doubt. I am unable to speak with certainty as to the structure of the
branchial vesicles, and failing precision on this point, the species is
provisionally referred to the genus Anonyx , to which it, at any rate,
seems most closely allied. It differs from all the other species of the
genus in its less compact and more slender form, in the absence of
eyes, in the want of distinctly forwardly projecting lateral lobes to the
head, in the very prominent and projecting epistomal plate, and in the
rounded epimera of the third segment of the metasome. The form of
the head closely resembles that seen in the genus Cyclocaris , but the
structure of the first gnathopods is quite sufficient to exclude it from
that genus. The latter character would also seem to separate it from
the genus Tmetonyx 1 ( = Hoplonyx, G-. O. Sars), to which, however, its
mouth parts more closely approximate than they do to those of
Anonyx , though the differences from either genus are at most slight.
It would be hazardous to define a new genus for its reception in the
absence of definite information on the structure of the branchial
vesicles. In the meantime it appears to be distinct, specifically, from
all known species of either of the three genera, Anonyx , Tmetonyx ,
or Cyclocaris. The species is named in honour of its discoverer.

Isopoda.

Family , /Egiioe.

Genus , Xenurasga, nov.

The mouth parts in the single specimen of this new genus available
were not dissected, and, in the absence of information on this point,
the new genus may be defined as follows :

Body depressed, with the cephalon very small, and the metasome
distinctly narrower than the mesosome

1 See Stebbing, ‘ Das Tierreich,’ 21 Lief., Amphipoda, i., Gammaridea, 1906, p. 76.

216

Amphipoda and Isopoda

Eyes absent.

Superior antennae with a three-jointed peduncle.

Inferior antennae with a fine- jointed peduncle, flagellum greatly
elongated and many-jointed.

First three pairs of legs with the propodus smooth, cylindrical, not
expanded ; dactylus extremely strong, hooked, sharply curved in the
centre, and terminating in a darkened, very sharp point.

Last four pairs of legs moderately slender, successively increasing
in length, ischium provided with a posterior lobe ; dactylus hook-
shaped.

Pleopods consisting throughout of a pair of broad lamella?, provided
with seta? all round.

Telson very small, leaving the pleopods quite uncovered, lingui-
form in shape, unarmed.

Uropods uniramous, consisting of short basal joint articulated
ventrally to the telson, and a terminal very long, stout spinous seta,
provided with numerous fine plumose seta?.

This remarkable new genus anteriorly resembles the genus
Syscenus , Harger ; but the form of the telson, the uncovered pleopods,
and the unique and rather anomalous form of the uropods at once
separates it from all other known members, not only of the family
AFgidce , but of the whole tribe F/ahellifera.

Xenurrsga Ptilocera, gen. et sp. nov.

Locality. — Lat. 36° 18' N., Long. 23° 53' W., June, 1904. Closing-
net, 400 fathoms.

Body (Plate V., Fig. 1) rather slender and slightly depressed,
about four times as long as the greatest width of the mesosome ;
ceplialon very small and triangular in shape, much narrower than the
first segment of the mesosome ; metasome rather more than one-third
of the total length of the body, much narrower than the mesosome,
the segments successively narrowing towards the posterior end.

Mesosome (Plate V., Fig. 1) with the first segment larger than
any of the succeeding ones, the remaining ones more or less subequal

Anon v

W. M. Tattersall deb

PI. IV

, sp. ILO V.

Lith.AnstwE.AFu.nke, Leipzig.

PI. V.

Xemiraecja ptilocera, cjen et.sp.nov.

II'. Af. Tatter:; oil del.

Iitk.AnstrZAFiml'e.Ldpzicf.

4-mphipoda and Isopoda

217

in length, but the posterior two narrower than any of the preceding ;
coxal plates well developed on all segments, those of the first segment
apparently fused to the segment anteriorly, hut free posteriorly.

Metasome (Plate V., Fig. 1) with the epimeral plates well
developed, slightly produced posteriorly, with their hinder margins
broadly emarginate.

Eyes absent.

Superior antennae (Plate V., Figs. 1 and 2) not longer than the
cephalon plus the first segment of the mesosome ; peduncle three-
jointed, the last joint the longest ; flagellum slightly longer than the
peduncle, and composed of eight joints.

Inferior antennae (Plate V., Figs. 1 and 2) about 22 millimetres in
length, longer than the body and very slender ; peduncle five-jointed,
the last joint the longest ; flagellum composed of more than seventy
joints ; last two joints of the peduncle and the proximal half of the
flagellum ornamented profusely with numerous very long, delicate
plumose setae.

Mouth parts not examined, but judging from other characters of
the species, probably closely resembling those of the genus Syscenus.

First three pairs of legs (Plate V., Fig. 4) comparatively short
and very strong and stout, unarmed ; carpus quite small ; propodus
cylindrical, not expanded ; dactylus remarkably strong, hooked,
sharply curved at the centre, tip very sharp and darkened in
colour.

Fourth pair of legs (Plate V., Fig. 5) moderately slender ; ischium
with its outer distal corner produced into a lobe extending almost to
the centre of the merus and armed with four stout spines, a similar
spine on its inner distal corner ; merus longer and stouter than the
carpus, with two and one spines on its outer and inner distal corners
respectively ; carpus with two small spines on its inner edge and two
larger spines on its inner distal corner ; propodus long and narrow,
equal in length to the carpus and merus combined, armed with four
small spines on its inner edge ; dactylus moderately stout and slightly
curved ; a few long, tine plumose setas on the inner edges of the

28

218

Amphipoda and Isopoda

ischium, merus, and carpus, similar to those on the inferior
antennae.

Fifth to seventh pairs of legs similar in structure to the fourth, but
successively longer, so that the seventh pair of legs extend consider-
ably beyond the telson and up to about the level of the posterior
margin of the pleopods ; fifth pair of legs with the propodus slightly
less than the merus and carpus combined, and the latter longer than
the merus ; sixth pair of legs with the carpus one and a half times as
long as the merus, and only one-seventh less than the propodus ;
seventh pair of legs with the carpus but very little less than the
propodus, and still one and a half times as long as the merus.

Pleopods wholly uncovered by the telson, with the lamell* of all
live pairs narrowly oval in shape, and all setose on both margins,
including the inner lamell* of the first pair.

Telson (Plate V., Fig. 1) quite small, little more than twice as
long as the last segment of the metasome, and about as broad at its
base as long, linguiform in shape, truncate at the apex, its margins
suddenly narrowing at about one-third of the length of the whole
telson, unarmed.

Uropods (Plate V., Fig. 1) uniramous, consisting of a single
basal joint articulated ventrally to the telson, and about two-thirds as
long as the latter, and a terminal very stout and very long stiff
spinous seta, 11 millimetres in length, and ornamented along the
posterior three-quarters of its length with numerous long fine plumose
set*.

Length of the single specimen, 18 millimetres from the head to
the tip of the telson, 29 millimetres from the head to the tip of the
uropods ; inferior antennae, 22 millimetres long.

I am unable to determine the sex of the type specimen. No
incubatory lamellae could be detected, nor, on the other hand, could
any trace of appendage be found on the inner lamellae of the second
pleopod.

The structure of the telson and uropods, and the exceedingly long
inferior antennae, with its beautiful decoration of delicate plumose set*,

Amphipoda and Isopoda

219

at once distinguish this species from all other Isopoda. The specimen
was caught in a closing-net lowered to 400 fathoms, at a depth of
over 1,000 fathoms, and the species is therefore presumably bathy-
pelagic in habitat.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Plate IV.

Anonyx Wolfendeni, sp. nov.

Fig. 1. — Posterior lateral angle of the third segment of the metasome.

„ 2. — Epistomal plate, with outline of the head to show amount of
projection.

„ 3. — Superior antenna.

,, 4. — Inferior antenna.

„ 5. — Oblique inside view of right mandible.

„ 6. — Mandibular palp.

,, 7. — First maxilla.

„ 8. — Second maxilla.

„ 9. — Maxillipede.

,, 10. — First gnathopod.

,, 11. — Second gnathopod.

„ 12. — Fourth leg.

„ 13. — Seventh leg.

„ 14. — First uropod.

,, 15. — Second uropod.

„ 16. — Third uropod.

„ 17.— Telson.

Plate V.

Xenurocga ptilocera, gen. et sp. nov.

Fiff. 1. — Dorsal view of whole animal.

O

,, 2. — Peduncle of superior antenna.

„ 3. — Peduncle of inferior antenna.

„ 4. — First leg.

III.— PYEOSOMA SPINOSUM, HERDMAN.

By George P. Farran, B.A.

Through the kindness of Dr. Wolfenden, I have had an opportunity
of examining two specimens of Pyrosoma , which had been taken by
Ids yacht, the Silver Belle , in February, 1906, off Cape St. Mary,
Portugal, at a depth of 200 fathoms.

Both of these apparently belong to Pyrosoma spinosum , which was
described by Herdman in 1888, from fragments of specimens taken by
the Challenger in the South Atlantic.

These specimens, like those taken by the Challenger , were captured
in the trawl, though possibly during the ascent of the net, and lead
one to suspect that the species lives at or near the bottom in deep
water, a fact which would account for the comparatively few records
— viz., two from the Challenger (Herdman, 1888), one from the
Talisman (Perrier, 1886), and one — a very young colony — from the
Helga (Farran, 1906). The two colonies were approximately equal in
size ; they were preserved in formalin, and were in excellent condition.
The one figured, from which the measurements were taken, measured
85 centimetres in length by 19 centimetres in circumference, but was
capable of a considerable amount of extension without rupture. The
walls were 6 millimetres in thickness throughout the greater part of
their length, but thickened considerably at the closed ventral end, and
thinning away round the common cloacal aperture. The whole colony
was tapered gradually to the closed end, which was rounded off* bluntly.
The open end had an irregular aperture of almost the full width of
the colony. Its edges did not show any trace of lips or diaphragm,

220

Pyrosoma Spinosum, Herdman

221

but were thinned away and slightly contracted, the zooids being
continued to the extreme margin. The substance of the test is
gelatinous and rather firm to the touch, but easily torn. It is almost
colourless, but the whole colony has a reddish tinge, due mainly to the
colour in the stomach and intestine of the zooids.

The outer surface of the colony is covered with short, sharp spines,
each spine being situated ventrally to the oral aperture of an ascidio-
zooid, and sloping towards it. The spines are keeled ventrally and
laterally, and are about 1 millimetre in height. The inner surface
of the colony, as mentioned by Herdman, is smooth and glistening.

The ascidiozooids are scattered closely through the test in no
apparent order, the old and young being irregularly mixed together.
They are very readily detached from the test, a considerable number
falling out, through the internal aperture, every time the specimen
was handled.

The general appearance of the individual ascidiozooid is best
explained in the accompanying figure, drawn from a full-sized
individual. The prebranchial space is very small, but varies with the
amount of contraction. The cloacal space is small in full-grown
individuals, but in young zooids is considerably elongate, forming
almost one-third of the total leno-th.

o

The oral aperture is usually very much contracted, and sometimes
apparently completely closed. It is fringed by a circle of tentacles,
about sixteen in number, irregular both in shape and size, and a single
long ventral tentacle rising from a cushion-like base. The ventral
tentacle is usually held vertically, projecting slightly from the mouth
opening, and is excluded when the mouth is completely closed. The
other tentacles are folded inwards.

The atrial opening is not circular, as is usual in Pyrosoma , but
pear-shaped, rounded above, and with the sides of the opening approxi-
mating for some distance below before they unite. This peculiar
arrangement seems to be due to the absence of muscle-fibres on
the ventral side of the opening, which allows the atriopore to split
ventrally. The pear-shaped opening was, however, found in zooids

222

Pyrosoma Spinosum , Herdman

of only 2 millimetres in length, which hacl not penetrated the inner
wall of the test.

The musculature of the oral opening consists of a well-developed
sphincter, outside which run several more or less completely circular
muscle fibres. The atrial opening is not closed by a sphincter, hut by
a horseshoe-shaped band of muscle, thinning away at each end.

The atrial muscle is placed much farther forward than is usual,
lying across the centre of the branchial sac. It consists on either side
of a hollow fusiform band, split externally for the greater part of its
length. It is much longer and more slender proportionately in the
young than in the old ascidiozooids. It lies in the thickness of the
body-wall. There are also two transverse muscle bands situated in
front of the branchial sac. The most anterior is situated between the
endostyle and the month opening, and consists of a broad transverse
ventral band of muscle, whose ends break up into fine branches in the
lateral body-wall. The other band is similar and similarly branched,
and lies slightly anterior to the dorsal ganglion.

The luminous organs are present as a patch of large circular
refractive cells, lying on either side of the body across the ciliated
band. There is a similar but smaller patch of cells on either side of
the atrial opening, which probably has a similar function.

The dorsal ganglion has been figured by Herdman. It gives rise,
with others, to two pair of easily- observed nerves, the posterior of
which run to the upper ends of the two atrial muscles, and the anterior
pair to the anal muscle, giving rise to branches on the way which
could not be traced.

The number of stigmata in a large ascidiozooid average about
forty, and the number of transverse bars about thirty. The relative
position of the stigmata and bars with reference to the oral aperture
and the oesophagus is rather unusual, as a line joining the two last
cuts across both stigmata and bars diagonally, while in the other species
of Pyrosoma such a line would be approximately parallel to the bars
and at right angles to the stigmata. This apparent distortion is due
to the wide distance which intervenes between the first of the dorsal

Pyrosoma Spinosum, Herdman

223

languets, which marks the point of attachment to the dorsal stolon in
young zooids, and the dorsal nucleus. In other species of Pyrosoma
the languets and the dorsal nucleus are closely approximated. The
number of languets is about twelve, of the usual form. The endostyle
is bent at an angle of about 140 degrees at its anterior third. The
stomach and gut are of a greenish-brown colour, the oesophagus being
bright red. They lie in the horizontal plane, the gut being folded
back laterally along the left side of the stomach.

The ovary was only observed in a few zooids. It contained a
single ovum ; a testis was not found in any instance. The presence of
filaments running through the test, and putting into communication
the atrial muscles of separate zooids, has been noted by several
observers (Huxley, 1860 ; Seeliger, etc.). Similar fibres could be
seen in P. spinosum , and numerous acicular and fusiform cells, similar
to those composing the filaments, were evident, scattered irregularly
through the test and, much more densely, in the body-walls of the
zooids themselves.

It will be seen from the above remarks that P. spinosum differs
very markedly from all other members of the genus. The principal
differences may be summed up as follows :

Test processes situated ventral to the oral openings of the zooids.

Atriopore with the sphincter incomplete.

Anterior position of the atrial muscle.

Wide separation of dorsal ganglion and dorsal languets.

List of Authorities quoted.

Farran (1906), ‘On the Distribution of the Thaliacea and Pyrosoma in Irish
Waters,’ ‘Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest.,’ 1906, 1. [1906].

Herdman (1388), ‘Report on the Tunicata,’ Pt. iii. ; Challenger Reports, Zoo/.,
vol. xxvii.

Huxley (1860), ‘On the Anatomy and Development of Pyrosoma,’ Trans. Linn.
Soc., vol. xxiii., I860.

Perrier (1886), ‘ Les Explorations Sous-marins ’ ( Talisman Expedition).

Seeliger (1895), ‘ Die Pyrosomen der Plankton Expedition,’ Bd. ii., E. b.

24

Pyrosoma Spinosum , Herdman

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Plate I.

Pyrosoma spinosum. x -§. From a photograph.

Plate II.

Fig. 1. Pyrosoma spinosum: lateral view of zooid.

Fig. 2.— Pyrosoma spinosum: oral aperture of zooid, from within.

a.m., atrial muscle.
an., anus.

a.s., anal sphincter.
d.g., dorsal ganglion.
en., endostyle.

Ian. , languets.
lu., luminous organ.

m., oral aperture.
o.s., oral sphincter.
ov., ovary.
st., stolon.

s. , stomach.

t. m., transverse muscle.
v.t., ventral tentacle.

ERRATA.

On page 224, far Plate I read Plate VI
for Plate II read Plate VII

PI, VI

Pyrosoma spinosum.

Ijitli. Anstalt v. K. A. Kunke, Leipzig.

PI. VII.

Litli. Anst. v. E. A., Fun k e, Lt*i | > /ig1.

Pyrosoma spinosum,

CRUISE OF THE ‘SILVER BELLE’ IN JULY AND

AUGUST, 1907.

Fishes.

By E. W. L. Holt and L. W. Byrne.

The cruise is divisible into two sections. In the last half of July the
ship ran from Scalloway about north-west to the 100-fathom line,
and thence proceeded on a zigzag course in a general south-westerly
direction, fishing and taking physical observations at sixteen stations,
at soundings ranging from 107 to 550 fathoms, until she came north
of the Butt of Lewis.

The next section of the cruise occupied the first seventeen days
of August, and comprised six stations (17 to 22), at soundings of
144 to 385 fathoms, between 58° and 59° N. and 8° and 9° W., thus
continuing the first section to the south-west, at an interval of about
a degree of longitude, and on the farther side of the Wyville-
Thomson ridge. A single station (23) was taken in shallow water
(72 fathoms), west of the Butt of Lewis, in the last week of August.
Dr. Wolfenden’s original design was to link up the numerous faunistic
observations which have been made in and about the Faeroe Channel
with those of the Irish coast, where the Atlantic slope has been pretty
thoroughly explored, down to 500 fathoms, from about 55° N. south-
wards. Incidentally it was intended to make a thorough exploration
of the grounds on which the Michael Sars in 1902 made a few hauls
with most interesting results. The weather appears to have been
about as bad as possible, and to have interfered greatly with the
efficiency of such operations as were possible, with the result that fish
were taken at only seven of the twenty-three stations.

225

29

226

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

We are indebted to Mr. Opie, who acted as naturalist during the
first section of the cruise, for very careful notes on the specimens
which came under his observation. During the rest of the cruise the
material was dealt with by Captain Buchan Henry.

So far as the fishes are concerned, the main interest lies in the
additional evidence afforded of the difference between the fauna of
the comparatively cold-water area lying to the north and east of the
Wyville-Thomson ridge and that of the warmer water which extends
southwards and westwards from that ridge.

The absence of any hauls from the immediate neighbourhood of
the actual ridge makes it impossible to say whether the species of fish
ordinarily found on either side of it are ever to be found in company
in its immediate neighbourhood, or whether the comparatively sudden
change of temperature forms a barrier which is not passed by fishes
which elsewhere have a range including both extremes. Among the
species taken by the Silver Belle , Sehastes marinus alone among
bottom-living forms was captured on both sides of the ridge, in
positive temperatures of 9'60 C. and 1*8° C. It is perhaps worthy of
remark that, while in the neighbourhood now under consideration
Cottunculus Tkomsoni is found only in the warmer regions, in tem-
peratures of about 7° to 8° C., and C. microps only in the colder
region, in temperatures of about 0° to -2° C., yet both species have
been taken between Iceland and Greenland in temperatures of about
3-5° C. (Liitken, 1898) and between 3'9° C. and 7'7° C. in the Western
Atlantic by the Albatross.

The main interest, so far as the fishes are concerned, lies in the
fact that some hauls were made in the cold-water area lying to the
north and east of the Wyville-Thomson ridge, and others in the warm-
water area to the south and west of that ridge. The extraordinary
difference of the fish fauna of these two adjacent areas shows
most clearly the great influence of temperature — or, perhaps, more
accurately speaking, of a sudden change of temperature— upon the
distribution of even such active animals as fishes.

Of the fifteen species of fish taken by the Silver Belle in the warm

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

227

area, all but one ( Sebastes marinus) occur at similar depths off' the
west and south-west of Ireland ; while of the six species (excluding
the pelagic Scopelus glacialis ) taken in the cold area, not one is
known to occur off the Irish coast. The only species common to both
areas is Sebastes marinus.

Further, of all the fishes recorded from the cold area, not a single
bottom-living species, with the solitary exception above mentioned,
has been found south or west of the Wyville-Thomson ridge ; while
the numerous species which have been taken immediately to the
south or west of the ridge (again excepting Sebastes marinus) are all
known from the deep water of the Irish Atlantic slope or from the
Lusitanian region.

Among the genera and species typical of the two regions, we may
mention : in the cold area, Ly codes , Lycodonus , Liparis Rhein hard ti ,
and Motella Rheinhardti ; and in the warm area, Centrophorus ,
Macrurus , Alepocephalus Criardi , Haloporphyrus eques , Synapho-
branclius pinnatus , and Epigonus telescopium.

Cases are even to be found of closely allied species each confined
to one area. Thus Cottunculus Thomsoni is found in the warm area
at a bottom temperature of about 7° to 8° C., and ranges south from
its northern boundary to the north-west coast of Africa ; while
C. microps occurs in the cold area at a bottom temperature of about
0° to - 2° C-., and ranges northwards to the neighbourhood of Spitz-
bergen. Yet both these species have been taken at temperatures of
3*5° C. between Iceland and Greenland (Liitken, 1898), and at tem-
peratures between S'O0 C. and 7’7° C. by the Albatross in the Western
Atlantic. It is, therefore, quite probable that the difference in the
faunas of the two regions is in part rather due to the sudden change
in temperature than to the absolute difference. Some, however, of
the species of the cold area — e.g., Lycodes endipleurostictus and Lyco-
donus flagellicauda — are only known to occur at very low tempera-
tures ; while other species found in the warm area — for example,
Alepocephalus Criardi and Epigonus telescopium — are distinctly
warm-water fishes.

29—2

228

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

ScYLLITDJE.

Pristiurus melanostomus (Raf.).

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom
temperature, 9'60 C. One, 565 millimetres.

Raiidal

Raid circularis (Couch — sensu stricto).

Station 19. 58° 28' N., 8° 29' W. 180 fathoms. Sand. One,

165 millimetres. (A second skate, of about the same size, not
preserved, was probably of the same species.)

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom
temperature, 9'6° C. One, young.

Raia ncevus 1 (Muller and Henle).

R. miraletus (Couch, nec L ).

Station 23. 58° 49' N., 6° 35' W. 72 fathoms. Shells and sand.

One, 73 millimetres across disc, with well-marked ocelli.

The depth at which this specimen was taken is worthy of note, as
R. ncevus is, in our experience, usually a littoral species not commonly
ranging beyond about the 40-fathom line.

ScOPELIDiE.

Scopelus gldcicilis (Rhein hard t).

Station 8. 60° 18' N., 4° 43' W. 330 fathoms. Gravel and shells.
Two, 67 and 55 millimetres (without caudal fins), were brought up by
the dredge ; there was nothing to show at what depth they entered
the net.

Macruriive.

Mdcrurus Icevis (Lowe).

Station 19. 58° 28' N., 8° 29' W. 180 fathoms. Sand. Two,

325 millimetres and 235 millimetres.

1 This is the only name which seems to us to have been first applied to the
familiar cuckoo ray.

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

229

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9‘6° C. One, 515 millimetres.

[Station 22. 58° 5' N., 8° 46' W. 144 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9\5° C. Four Macrurus (not preserved) were probably
of this species.]

This widely-ranging species is apparently absent from the cold-
water area of the North Atlantic, as it was not met with either by the
Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition (Collett, 1880), /ragoZ/YLiitken,
1898), or Michael Sars (Collett, 1905), although abundant off the
southern part of the west coast of Ireland. With the exception of
two specimens found dead on the coasts of Norway and Denmark, the
above are the most northerly records known to us.

Gadidte.

Gad us argenteus (Guiclienot).

Station 21. 58 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9-6° C. One, 125 millimetres long.

Brosmius brosme (Midler).

Station 19. 58° 28' N., 8° 29' W. 180 fathoms. Sand. One,
480 millimetres.

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9-6° C. One, 610 millimetres, ca. ( teste Buchan Henry).

Phycis blennioides (Brimnich).

Station 19. 58° 28' N., 8° 29' W. 180 fathoms. Sand. One,
315 millimetres, ca. (damaged).

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9-6° C. One, 430 millimetres, ca.

Station 22. 58° 5' N., <S° 46' W. 144 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9 ’5° C. One ( teste Buchan Henry).

Motella Rheinhardti (Ivroyer).1

Station 9. 60° 4' N., 5° 47' W. 495 fathoms. Bottom tempera-

ture, — 0‘8° C. One, 145 millimetres long.

1 We are indebted to Mr. C. T. Ryan for kindly identifying this species.

230

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

Station 10. 60° 3' N., 6° 24' W. 496 fathoms. Gravel, sand,

mud, shells, and stones. Bottom temperature, -04° C. Two, 115
and 135 millimetres long.

Mr. Opie notes the colours shortly after capture as pinkish-brown
or light brown, slightly darker dorsally, belly between anus and ventral
fins very dark ; pectoral, anal, and caudal fins pink, dorsal fin darker.

PLEURONECTIDiE.

Hippoglossoules platessoides (Fabricius).

Station 19. 58° 28' N., 8° 29' W. 180 fathoms. Sand. One,

175 millimetres (perhaps others, which were not preserved).

Pleuronectes microcephalus (Donovan).

Station 23. 58° 49' N., 6° 35' W. 72 fathoms. Shells and sand.
Two, 115 and 103 millimetres.

Pleuronectes eynoglossus (L.).

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9'6° C. Two, 235 and 230 millimetres.

Zeugopterus megastoma (Donovan).

Station 19. 58° 28' N., 8° 29' W. 180 fathoms. Sand. One,

315 millimetres (perhaps others, which were not preserved).

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9 *6° C. One, 225 millimetres, and (teste Buchan Henry)
seven others up to 300 millimetres, ca.

Station 22. 58° 15' N., 8° 46' W. 144 fathoms. Sand. Bottom

temperature, 9\5° C. Five (teste Buchan Henry).

Station 23. 58° 49' N., 6° 35' W. 72 fathoms. Shells and sand.

One, 150 millimetres.

The specimen from Station 23 was speckled with black more or
less all over the ocular side of the body and fins, and had a few larger
blotches on the body.

GOBIIDiE.

Gohius Jeffreysii (Gunther).

Station 23. 58° 49' N., 6° 35' W. 72 fathoms. Shells and sand.
One, 50 millimetres.

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

231

ScORPiENIDiE.

Scorpcena dactyloptera (Delaroche).

Station 15. 50° 15' N., 8° 1' W. 320 fathoms. Grey sand.

Bottom temperature, 8'7° C. One, 285 millimetres.

Sehastes marinus (L.).

Station 8. 60° 18' N., 4° 43' W. 330 fathoms. Gravel and shells.
Bottom temperature, l'S0 C. Two, 280 and 245 millimetres.

Station 21. 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sand. Bottom
temperature, 9,6° C. One, 240 millimetres.

CoTTimp.

Cottunculus mice ops (Collett).

Station 10. 00° 3' N., 0° 24' W. 49G fathoms. Gravel, sand, mud,
shells and stones. Bottom temperature, — 0T°C. Ten specimens,
148 to 245 millimetres long.

One of the smallest specimens, 148 millimetres long, was a female
containing ripe ova, which were 4 millimetres in diameter. Collett
(1905) observed ova 4\5 millimetres in diameter in a female 195 milli-
metres long. The ova are evidently demersal, like those of Coitus^ and,
in all probability, are similarly deposited in masses. Mr. Opie made
the following note of the colours of these specimens when freshly
caught : ‘ The tail was light-coloured ; anterior to this was a brown
band, and in front of this another light band, including the dorsal and
anal tins ; then another brown band, followed by another light band, and
then a brown band extending to the operculum. In front of this
another light band extended nearly to the eye. The face was spotted
more distinctly in some specimens than in others ; the tip of the nose
was light in most cases, but not in all ; there was a dark patch under
the eye. The belly was a bluish-white ; the under side of the pectoral
fin was very dark. The eye was bright bluish-green, with a bright
margin.’

The specimens show considerable variation in the occipital spines
or tubercles, which may be practically simple or bicornate or tri-
cornate.

232

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

C. microps occurs on muddy, sandy, gravelly, and stony ground, at
depths of from about 100 to 680 fathoms. It appears to be a distinctly
cold-water species, the highest temperature record being 7-7° C.
(Albatross), and the lowest — 0‘21° C. (Collett, 1905). On the eastern
side of the Atlantic it ranges as far north as the open sea south and
west of Spitzbergen, up to 80° N. (Collett, 1880), and as far south as
the cold area of the Faeroe Channel, where it has been taken by the
Knight Errant in 307 to 608 fathoms (Gunther, 1887), and by the Silver
Belle. It was not found by the Michael Sars in hauls south-west of
Faeroe and north-west of the Hebrides, where the bottom temperature
was about 8° C. (Collett, 1905), and has never occurred in the area
west of Ireland fished by the Helga.

On the American side of the Atlantic the recorded range of
C. microps extends as far north as Davis Strait (Lutken, 1895) and as
far south as 31° N. (Goode and Bean, 1895), the recorded temperatures
varying from 7 -7° C. to 3‘2° C. ; the former temperature is consider-
ably higher than any at which the species is known to occur in the
Eastern Atlantic, where, however, it has been taken at 5’8° C. between
Iceland and Greenland.

Liparis Rheinhardti (Kroyer).

Station 10. 60° 3' N., 6° 24' W. 496 fathoms. Gravel, sand, mud,

shells, and stones. Bottom temperature, —OH0 C. Three — 62, 55, and
52 millimetres long.

When newly captured these fish were ( teste Mr. Opie) pink in
colour, with shiny bluish-white abdomens.

C ALLION YMIDiE.

Callionymus , sp.

Station 23. 58° 49' N., 6° 35' W. 72 fathoms. Shells and sand.
One very small specimen, 21 millimetres long.

Lycodes endipleurostictus (Jensen).

Station 10. 60° 3' N., 6° 24' W. 496 fathoms. Gravel, sand, mud,

shells, and stones. Bottom temperature, — 0T° C. One, 115 milli-
metres long.

Fishes of 1907 Cruise

23.3

Mr. Opie noted the colour soon after capture as light brown, with
White vertical bands ; the fins darker in colour than the body ; abdomen
brilliant blue.

Lycodonus flagellicauda (Jensen).

Station 10. 60° 3' N., 6° 24' W. 496 fathoms. Gravel, sand, mud,

shells, and stones. Bottom temperature, —0-1° C. One, 234 milli-
metres long.

Mr. Opie noted the colour soon after capture as follows : ‘ Behind
the abdomen the body was a very pale French grey ; the abdomen
was a shiny brilliant blue.’

A widely distributed species, ranging from near Spitzbergen and
north of Iceland to the Faeroe Channel, at depths of from 460 to 1,000
fathoms — always in cold water, the recorded temperatures all lying
between — 0'03° C. and — 1'5° C. (see Jensen, 1904, and Collett, 1905).

STATIONS OF THE ‘ SILVER BELLE,1 1907.

Station 1. — July 12: 60° 44' N., 2° 50' W. 153 fathoms. Trawl. Nearly one
hour.

Station 2.— July 12: 60° 47' N., 2° 55' W. 280 to 300 fathoms. Bottom
temperature, 8° C. Trawl, two hours, on its back.

Station 2 (continued). — Same locality. 300 fathoms. Trawl, one hour.

Station 3.— July 13: 60° 46' N., 3° 36' W. Temperature, -0'4° C. 451
fathoms. Trawl, not on bottom.

Station 3 ( continued ). — 507 fathoms. Shingle. Bottom temperature, 0 4 C.
Trawl.

Station 4, — July 14: ‘507 fathoms. Bottom temperature, O' 4° C.1 This entry
is probably wrong. The depth at station 4 appears from chart of cruise to
have been 550 fathoms. Trawl did not reach bottom, so any bottom animals
labelled station 4 must belong to station 3.

Station 5. — July 14 : 60° 15' N., 4° 25' W. 265 fathoms. Shingle. Bottom
temperature, 7° C. Trawl.

Station 5 (continued). — July 15 : 60° 26' N., 4° 8' W. 352 fathoms. Rough
ground. Bottom temperature, 1'8° C. Agassiz trawl.

Station 6.- — July 16 : 59° 55' N., 4° 38° W. 97 fathoms. Rocks and stones.
Surface temperature, 11 '4° C. Bottom temperature, 9'5° C. Dredge.

Station 7.— July 17 : 60° 7' N., 4° 52' W. 216 fathoms. Gravel and large
stones. Bottom temperature, 7° C. Dredge.

30

234

Stations of the ‘ Silver Belle,' 1907

Station 8. — July 17 : 60° 18' N., 4° 43' W. 330 fathoms. Gravel and shells.

Surface temperature, 10° C. ; bottom temperature, 1 ‘8° C. Dredge and trawl.
.Station 9. — July 18 : 60° 4' N., 5° 47' W. 495 fathoms. Surface temperature,
11° C. ; bottom temperature, 0’8° C. Trawl.

Station 10. — July 19 : 60° 3' N., 6° 24' W. 496 fathoms. Gravel, sand, mud,
shells, and stones. Bottom temperature, 0T° C. Agassiz trawl.

Station 11. — July 20: 60° 4' N., 6° 23' W. 160 fathoms. Beam trawl.

Station 12. — July 27 : 60° 37' N., 8° 10' W. 220 fathoms. Rocks and shingle.

Surface temperature, 10’6° C. ; bottom temperature, 8° C. Otter trawl.
Station 13. — July 27 : 60° 32' N., 8° 8' W. 357 fathoms. Rocks and shingle.

Surface temperature, 10 6° C. Otter trawl, when hauled, found to be broken.
Station 14. — July 28 : 60° 13' N., 8° 40' W. 760 fathoms. Mud. Plankton
net. Plankton was taken at the following depths :

Surface ...

100 fathoms

200

300

400

500

600

700

55

55

55

55

55

Temperature.

11-3° C.
8-8° C.
8-3° C.
7 9° C.
7-6° C.
6-8° C.
6-2° C.
4-0° C.

8° 1' W. 320 fathoms. Grey sand.

Otter trawl.

Surface

Station 15. — July 29 : 60° 15' N.

temperature, 12-3° C. ; bottom temperature, 8 7° C.

Station 15 ( continued ). — Same locality. Agassiz trawl.

Station 16. — July 31 : 59° 17 N., 7° 52' W. 383 fathoms. Shingle. Surface
temperature, 11 ’4° C. ; bottom temperature, 8'8° C. Otter trawl.

Station 17. —August 1 : 58° 58' N., 8° 14' W. 385 fathoms. Shingle. Surface
temperature, 11 '6° C. Agassiz trawl.

Station 18. — August 1 : 58° 54' N., 8° 30' W. Gravel. Surface temperature,
12° C. Otter trawl.

Station 18 ( continued ). — Same locality. Dredge.

Station 19. — August 2 : 58° 28' N., 8° 29' W. 180 fathoms. Sand. Otter
trawl.

Station 20. — August 3: 58° 32' N., 8° 28' W. 216 fathoms. Sand. Bottom
temperature, 9‘4° C. Otter trawl.

Station 20 ( continued ). — Same locality. Agassiz trawl.

Station 21.— August 4: 58° 19' N., 8° 51' W. 191 fathoms. Sandy. Bottom
temperature, 9'6° C. Otter trawl.

Station 22.— August 17 : 58° 15' N., 8° 46' W. 144 fathoms. Sand. Bottom
temperature, 9'5° C. Otter trawl.

Station 23. — -August 8 : 58° 49' N., 6° 35' W. 72 fathoms. Shells and sand
Agassiz trawl.